WO2018082244A1 - Method and device for configuring demodulation reference signal, computer storage medium - Google Patents

Method and device for configuring demodulation reference signal, computer storage medium Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2018082244A1
WO2018082244A1 PCT/CN2017/078110 CN2017078110W WO2018082244A1 WO 2018082244 A1 WO2018082244 A1 WO 2018082244A1 CN 2017078110 W CN2017078110 W CN 2017078110W WO 2018082244 A1 WO2018082244 A1 WO 2018082244A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
reference signal
demodulation reference
different
signaling
communication node
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2017/078110
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
蒋创新
弓宇宏
梅猛
陈艺戬
张楠
李儒岳
鲁照华
Original Assignee
中兴通讯股份有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 中兴通讯股份有限公司 filed Critical 中兴通讯股份有限公司
Publication of WO2018082244A1 publication Critical patent/WO2018082244A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/20Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/23Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L27/00Modulated-carrier systems
    • H04L27/26Systems using multi-frequency codes
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L27/00Modulated-carrier systems
    • H04L27/26Systems using multi-frequency codes
    • H04L27/2601Multicarrier modulation systems
    • H04L27/2602Signal structure
    • H04L27/261Details of reference signals
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0048Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates to the field of wireless communications, and more particularly to a method and apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal, and a computer storage medium, relating to the research direction of 5G communication.
  • the density of the demodulation reference signal in the time domain should be high to meet the characteristics of fast change in the channel time domain caused by high Doppler shift, and For low-speed users, the demodulation reference signal in the time domain can be loose due to the slower change of the channel in the time domain.
  • the base station in one time domain unit, can be configured to provide high speed user 2 column reference signals, and configured to low speed user 1 column demodulation reference signals.
  • the base station is required to configure the user to configure a high-density demodulation reference signal in the frequency domain, and if the user's channel is relatively flat in the frequency domain. Then, the base station can configure the user to configure a low-density demodulation reference signal in the frequency domain.
  • the left picture shows the high-density demodulation reference signal in the frequency domain
  • the right picture shows the low-density demodulation reference signal in the frequency domain.
  • the demodulation device can quickly demodulate the demodulation reference signal to demodulate the data, that is, speed up data demodulation.
  • the demodulation reference signal is placed in a time domain In the middle of the element, the performance of the channel estimation will be better, but it is not conducive to fast data demodulation.
  • the left picture shows the demodulation reference signal placed at the front end of the transmitting unit, and the right picture is placed in the middle of the transmitting unit.
  • a scheduling manner in which multiple minimum scheduling units are aggregated can reduce scheduling overhead.
  • a minimum scheduling unit is a time slot
  • the base station may allocate a resource of one time slot or a resource of multiple time slots to the user. As shown in FIG. 4, the base station allocates one slot to the user 1 in one scheduling, and allocates resources to the two slots of the user 2.
  • the base station allocates a time slot to the user and only one demodulation reference signal of the time domain symbol is configured in one time slot, then the orthogonal mask (OCC) cannot be used to distinguish multiple times in the time domain. user.
  • the base station allocates two demodulation reference signals of the time domain symbols to the user in one time slot, the length 2 OCC sequence can be applied to the symbols of the two demodulation reference signals, which is similar to long term evolution. (LTE, Long Term Evolution) R10 uplink demodulation reference signal. Since the number of time slots allocated in the time domain may dynamically change in one scheduling, and the number of time domain symbols of the demodulation reference signal of each time slot may also change, the length of the OCC in the time domain cannot be determined.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • the NR employs a ZC sequence.
  • the bandwidth used to demodulate the reference signal is divided into a plurality of sub-bands, each of which is used to transmit a complete ZC sequence, that is, the length of the ZC sequence is equal to the length of the sub-band.
  • the advantage of this scheme is that the sequence of demodulation reference signals can be derived from the allocated resource locations and does not vary according to the allocated resource length. However, the details have yet to be further designed to achieve maximum interference randomization and minimal signaling overhead. Root or root of the ZC sequence as described in LTE 36.211 The sequence refers to the u value or v value of the uplink reference signal in LTE.
  • an embodiment of the present disclosure provides a method and apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal, and a computer storage medium.
  • the first communication node indicates to the second communication node, by using preset signaling, a parameter used for demodulating the reference signal; wherein the parameter used for demodulating the reference signal includes at least one of: a type of sequence of the demodulation reference signal, Time domain location, pattern, density, orthogonal code length, root sequence, cyclic shift sequence, number of ports, number of time domain symbols, indication information whether or not to transmit simultaneously with data.
  • the second communication node determines a parameter used for demodulating the reference signal by receiving preset signaling sent by the first communication node; wherein the parameter used for demodulating the reference signal includes at least one of: demodulating the reference signal The type of the sequence, the time domain position, the pattern, the density, the orthogonal code length, the root sequence, the cyclic shift sequence, the number of ports, the number of time domain symbols, and whether or not the information is transmitted simultaneously with the data.
  • An apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal provided by an embodiment of the present disclosure is applied to a first communication node, where the apparatus includes:
  • the indicating unit is configured to indicate, by using preset signaling, the second communication node, the parameter used for demodulating the reference signal; wherein the parameter used for demodulating the reference signal comprises at least one of: a type of sequence of the demodulated reference signal Time domain location, pattern, density, orthogonal code length, root sequence, cyclic shift sequence, number of ports, number of time domain symbols, and indication information whether or not to transmit simultaneously with data.
  • An apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal provided by an embodiment of the present disclosure is applied to a second communication node, where the apparatus includes:
  • a determining unit configured to determine a parameter used for demodulating the reference signal by receiving preset signaling sent by the first communications node; wherein the parameter used for demodulating the reference signal comprises at least one of: demodulating a reference signal The type of the sequence, the time domain position, the pattern, the density, the orthogonal code length, the root sequence, the cyclic shift sequence, the number of ports, the number of time domain symbols, and whether or not the information is transmitted simultaneously with the data.
  • a computer storage medium provided by an embodiment of the present disclosure stores a computer program configured to perform the above-described method of configuring a demodulation reference signal.
  • the first communication node indicates, by using preset signaling, the second communication node, the parameter used for demodulating the reference signal; wherein the parameter used for demodulating the reference signal includes at least one of the following: The type of the demodulation reference signal, the time domain position, the pattern, the density, the orthogonal code length, the root sequence, the cyclic shift sequence, the number of ports, the number of time domain symbols, and whether or not the information is transmitted simultaneously with the data. .
  • the configuration parameter indicating the demodulation reference signal implied by other signaling is implemented, which saves signaling overhead.
  • the root sequence on different sub-bands the loop thinks that the pattern change can bring interference randomization.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram 1 of a data structure according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 2 is a second schematic diagram of a data structure according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram 3 of a data structure according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram 4 of a data structure according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram 5 of a data structure according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram 6 of a data structure according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a data structure according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a data structure of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 9a is a schematic diagram IX of a data structure according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • 9b is a schematic diagram of a data structure of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • Figure 10a is a schematic diagram 11 of the data structure of the embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 10b is a schematic diagram of a data structure of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 10c is a schematic diagram of a data structure of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • Figure 10d is a schematic diagram showing the data structure of the embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a data structure of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of a data structure of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a data structure of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of a data structure of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • 15 is a schematic diagram of a data structure of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • 16 is a schematic diagram of a data structure of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic flowchart 1 of a method for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 18 is a second schematic flowchart of a method for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 19 is a first schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 20 is a second structural diagram of an apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of frequency division multiplexing of DMRS and data according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram of a DMRS occupying one or two columns of time domain symbols according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram of different DMRS ports corresponding to different DMRS patterns according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • Figure 24a is a schematic diagram 1 of a time slot according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • Figure 24b is a second schematic diagram of a time slot according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • Figure 24c is a schematic diagram of a time slot of the embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 25 is a diagram showing different DMRS subset spacings corresponding to different slot structures according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. intention;
  • 26 is a schematic diagram of a DMRS pattern of two symbols of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • a time slot in the present disclosure may refer to a minimum time unit scheduled at one time, and is composed of multiple time domain symbols, such as multiple Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) symbols.
  • a time slot can also refer to one subframe.
  • the time domain location or the other parameters such as the pattern of the demodulation reference signal are implicitly indicated by the indication signaling of the positive/negative acknowledgement (ACK/NACK) feedback delay;
  • the cell length, frequency domain length, etc. implicitly indicate the density and/or pattern of the demodulation reference signal.
  • the signaling indicating the number of demodulation reference signal ports indicates whether the demodulation reference signal is continuous or discontinuous in the frequency domain.
  • the first communication node indicates an orthogonal code length used to demodulate the reference signal by indicating one or more of the following signaling. Signaling indicating a length of the time domain scheduling symbol, signaling indicating a maximum length of the orthogonal code, signaling indicating the parameter of the demodulation reference signal.
  • the root sequence on different subbands, the cyclic shift sequence, the pattern can be different, and jump over time.
  • two or more sub-band lengths can be supported.
  • the first communication node in the embodiment of the present disclosure refers to a base station, a cell, and the like, and of course, other devices are not excluded.
  • the second communication node generally refers to a user terminal or the like.
  • the first communication node indicates to the second communication node the parameters used for demodulating the reference signal by preset signaling.
  • the parameters used for demodulating the reference signal include one or more of a sequence of a demodulation reference signal, a time domain position, a pattern, a density, an orthogonal code length, a root sequence, a cyclic shift sequence, and a number of ports.
  • the preset signaling here may be radio resource control (RRC, Radio) Resource Control) High-level signaling, which can also be predefined information, can be physical layer dynamic signaling.
  • the sequence of the demodulated reference signal generally refers to a PN sequence or a ZC sequence.
  • the time domain location refers to which time domain symbol in the demodulation reference signal is located in a time domain unit.
  • the left and right diagrams of FIG. 3 refer to different demodulation reference signal time domain settings.
  • the density of the demodulation reference signal refers to the number of reference signals in a time-frequency resource, such as a resource block (RB, Resource Block).
  • RB resource block
  • For the length of the orthogonal code if it is an OCC code, the length is 2, The sequence [1 1] and [1 -1] are included, and the OCC can be used to distinguish two users. And if the length of the OCC code is 4, then the OCC sequence includes [1 1 1 1], [1 -1 1 -1], [1 1 -1 -1], and [1 -1 -1 1], which can be used. To distinguish 4 users.
  • the orthogonal code can also be other codes, such as DFT codes, such as length 3, including [1 1 1], [1 exp(j*2*pi/3) exp(j*2*pi*2/ 3)], [1 exp(j*2*pi*2/3) exp(j*2*pi*4/3)], three users can be multiplexed using DFT orthogonal codes.
  • DFT codes such as length 3, including [1 1 1], [1 exp(j*2*pi/3) exp(j*2*pi*2/ 3)], [1 exp(j*2*pi*2/3) exp(j*2*pi*4/3)]
  • three users can be multiplexed using DFT orthogonal codes.
  • the orthogonal code length is 1, that is, there is no orthogonal code
  • the orthogonal code sequence of length 1 may be considered as [1].
  • orthogonality of length 2 can be performed on the REs of the same subcarrier on the two time domain symbols, as shown in FIG.
  • the code used by User 1 on two different time domain symbols on the same subcarrier is [1 1], while User 2 uses [1 -1].
  • the first communication node instructs the second communication node to indicate a parameter used for demodulating the reference signal by signaling indicating an ACK/NACK feedback delay. Due to the current flexible A/N feedback delay configuration is very popular.
  • the base station schedules downlink data in the time slot n, and after the k time slots, that is, the time slot n+k, the user will feedback to the base station whether the data is demodulated correctly or not.
  • the demodulation reference signal is located at the front end of one subframe. If the user has sufficient time to demodulate the data, that is, the value of k is large, the position of the demodulation reference signal can be placed in the middle of the time slot, which is advantageous for channel estimation.
  • the preset signaling is used to indicate a demodulation reference when demodulating the reference signal pattern.
  • the type of sequence used by the signal Since the ZC sequence is preferably transmitted continuously, or at equal intervals, the interval is preferably not too large. If the frequency range of the DMRS pattern configured by the base station to the user is too large, the sequence may not be a ZC sequence by default.
  • DMRS Since the uplink supports both cyclic prefix orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (CP-OFDM) waveforms and discrete Fourier transform spread spectrum orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (DFT-S-OFDM) waveforms, DMRS
  • CP-OFDM cyclic prefix orthogonal frequency division multiplexing
  • DFT-S-OFDM discrete Fourier transform spread spectrum orthogonal frequency division multiplexing
  • DMRS The PN sequence is used in the CP-OFDM mode (similar to the sequence adopted by the LTE downlink DMRS), and two consecutive OFDM symbols can be used for uplink DMRS transmission to support multi-user multiplexing because 2 consecutive OFDM symbols can support More multi-users.
  • the ZC sequence may be adopted in the DFT-S-OFDM mode, but it may not be necessary to support multi-user scheduling, or it is not necessary to schedule too many users at the same time.
  • the preset signaling is used to indicate the type of sequence used to demodulate the reference signal when demodulating the reference signal pattern.
  • the pattern of the demodulation reference signal refers to whether two consecutive time domain symbols are supported to transmit the DMRS.
  • the signaling of frequency domain resource allocation is used to implicitly indicate the length of the ZC sequence.
  • Different frequency domain resource allocation modes indicate different sequences. For example, if the resources allocated by the base station to the user by using a certain resource allocation mode are continuous in the frequency domain, or are divided into multiple segments in the frequency domain, and each segment is continuous, then the resource allocation is performed. The sequence corresponding to the mode is the ZC sequence. And if the resource allocation method is discrete, then the corresponding PN sequence. Or determine whether it is a ZC sequence according to the length of the frequency domain resource allocation.
  • the preset signaling is used to indicate the number of demodulation reference signal ports, and is also used to indicate whether the transmission of the demodulation reference signal in the frequency domain is continuous or discontinuous. That is to say, whether the demodulation reference signal is continuously transmitted in the frequency domain or discrete transmission is related to the number of DMRS ports or the number of layers of data.
  • the preset signaling is used to indicate the demodulation reference signal pattern or density, and is also used to indicate the orthogonal code length used for demodulating the reference signal.
  • the first communication node indicates a demodulation reference by indicating one or more of the following signaling The orthogonal code length used by the signal.
  • Signaling indicating a length of the time domain scheduling symbol signaling indicating a maximum length of the orthogonal code, signaling indicating the parameter of the demodulation reference signal.
  • the preset signaling is used to indicate the orthogonal code length used for demodulating the reference signal, and is also used to indicate the demodulation reference signal pattern or density. That is, the base station carries the information of the demodulation reference signal pattern with some signaling, and also carries the information of the orthogonal code length of the demodulation reference signal. That is to say, the orthogonal code length used by the DMRS is related to the pattern of the demodulation reference signal, the density, the length of the time domain scheduling unit, the maximum length of the configured orthogonal code, and the like.
  • the pattern of the DMRS may be configurable, that is, the base station may configure multiple DMRS patterns for the user, and different DMRS patterns may have different time-frequency densities or occupy different time-frequency resources.
  • the length setting range of the orthogonal code is also related to the pattern of the DMRS. For example, in a time slot, if there is only one column of DMRS, the length of the orthogonal code in the time domain is 1, that is, it is impossible to distinguish orthogonal DMRS ports or users in the time domain by using orthogonal codes. If a time slot has two columns of DMRS, an orthogonal code of length 2 can be utilized in the time domain.
  • the primary scheduling resource in the NR may include one or more time slots
  • the number of DMRS columns included in the primary scheduling unit is related to the number of time slots included in the scheduling unit, and also the DMRS included in one time slot. The number is related. Therefore, the length of the orthogonal code that can be used in the time domain cannot exceed the number of DMRS columns included in one scheduling unit. Since the speed of the user is different, the fast user has a fast channel change in the time domain, so the number of DMRS columns included in the time domain orthogonal code cannot be excessive, even if the scheduling unit allocated by the user is long. Therefore, the base station can give the user a maximum orthogonal code length in a semi-static configuration.
  • the orthogonal code used by the actually transmitted DMRS is used.
  • the length is the number of DMRS symbols included in the scheduling unit.
  • the user follows The maximum orthogonal code length set by the base station to transmit the DMRS or receive the DMRS.
  • the preset signaling is used to indicate the density and/or pattern of the demodulation reference signal, and is also used to indicate scheduling resources. That is to say, the density of the demodulation reference signal, and/or the pattern is related to the signaling of the allocated resource, for example, the size of the allocated resource includes the length of the time domain and the length of the frequency domain. For example, if the length of the time domain unit allocated by the base station when scheduling the user is one time slot, it is better to place more than one time domain symbol demodulation reference signal in the time slot, which is advantageous for the receiver to estimate more. Pule frequency shift and frequency offset estimation. If the base station schedules users to allocate multiple slots at a time, then some reference signals may be placed with less time domain symbols. For example, the allocation mode of resource scheduling, such as whether it is discretely allocated or continuously allocated in the frequency domain, also indicates the pattern of the DMRS.
  • the first communication node indicates a pattern used to demodulate the reference signal by indicating one or more of the following signaling, density and/or sequence: signaling indicating a modulation and coding mode, signaling indicating a transmission mode, and retransmission indication Signaling, receiving mode. That is to say, the user can use the MCS signaling configured by the base station, and the transmission mode signaling, such as open loop multiplexing, closed loop multiplexing, and transmit diversity, and the transmission mode is different, whether the data is retransmitted, and the receiving mode of the user is different. Get some information about the pattern or sequence of the DMRS.
  • the first communication node is configured by the high-level signaling to the second communication node for multiple demodulation reference signal parameters or configured by a high-level signaling from a predefined plurality of demodulation reference signal patterns to a part of the second communication node. And, the first communication node notifies, by dynamic signaling, which parameter or pattern of the demodulation reference signal used by the second communication node is the higher layer signaling.
  • the demodulation reference signal can have a variety of patterns, density, sequence, orthogonal code length, etc., corresponding to different demodulation reference signal parameters.
  • Such a system can predefine a large DMRS pattern or set of parameters, and this DMRS set can contain all patterns, sequences, orthogonal code lengths, and the like.
  • the base station can semi-statically select a DMRS subset from the set through high-level signaling, and the subset includes some DMRS patterns suitable for the user, and/or density, time-frequency domain. Location, and / Or sequence, and/or orthogonal code length, and the like. In actual scheduling, the base station needs to dynamically inform the user which DMRS parameter or pattern used in a certain scheduling unit is a subset of the higher layer signaling configuration.
  • the bandwidth used for demodulation reference signal transmission can be divided into several sub-bands. Each subband is a complete sequence.
  • the preset signaling is used to indicate that the demodulation reference signal is used in a subsequence used on a subband of a transmitting unit, and is also used to indicate different subbands of the demodulation reference signal on the same transmitting unit, and/ Or the same sub-bands of different transmitting units, and/or root sequences used on different sub-bands of different transmitting units;
  • the root sequences on different sub-bands are different or the same; the root sequences on the same sub-band of different transmitting units are different or the same.
  • the preset signaling is used to indicate that the demodulation reference signal is used in a cyclic shift sequence used on a subband of a transmitting unit, and is also used to indicate different subbands of the demodulation reference signal on the same transmitting unit, And/or different sub-bands of different transmitting units, and/or cyclic shift sequences used on different sub-bands of different transmitting units;
  • the order of the cyclic shift sequences on different sub-bands is different or the same; wherein, the order of the cyclic shift sequences on the same sub-band of different transmitting units is different or the same.
  • the preset signaling is used to indicate the code sequence number used by the demodulation reference signal on a subband of a transmitting unit, and is also used to indicate different subbands of the demodulation reference signal on the same transmitting unit, and/ Or the same sub-bands of different transmitting units, and/or the number of patterns used on different sub-bands of different transmitting units;
  • sequence numbers of the different sub-bands are different or the same; wherein the code numbers on the same sub-bands of different transmission units are different or the same.
  • each sub-band uses a ZC sequence.
  • the base station can define that the minimum frequency domain resource allocated by each user is 1 sub-band. So, users can be based on allocated resources
  • the subband position gets the corresponding DMRS sequence.
  • the first communication node uses the signaling to indicate that the bandwidth used by the second communication node to demodulate the reference signal transmission supports multiple partitioning methods according to different sub-band lengths.
  • the subband division is too small, the characteristics of the ZC sequence will be destroyed. If the subband is too large, the minimum scheduling frequency domain unit is too large, and the user base stations of some small packet services can only allocate too many resources to them. This will waste resources.
  • the embodiment of the present disclosure is not limited to the demodulation reference signal, and the disclosure related to the embodiment 5 can also be applied to the uplink sounding reference signal as well.
  • the embodiments of the present disclosure are also not limited to the uplink description or the downlink transmission.
  • sequences of the embodiments of the present disclosure are also not limited to the ZC sequence and the PN sequence. Especially for the contents of the embodiments 1 to 4.
  • FIG. 17 is a first schematic flowchart of a method for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in FIG. 17, the method for configuring a demodulation reference signal includes:
  • Step 1701 The first communication node indicates, by using preset signaling, the second communication node, the parameter used for demodulating the reference signal, where the parameter used for demodulating the reference signal includes at least one of the following: a sequence of demodulating the reference signal Type, time domain position, pattern, density, orthogonal code length, root sequence, cyclic shift sequence, number of ports, number of time domain symbols, and indication information whether or not to transmit simultaneously with data.
  • the parameter used for demodulating the reference signal includes at least one of the following: a sequence of demodulating the reference signal Type, time domain position, pattern, density, orthogonal code length, root sequence, cyclic shift sequence, number of ports, number of time domain symbols, and indication information whether or not to transmit simultaneously with data.
  • the first communication node instructs the second communication node to indicate a parameter used for demodulating the reference signal by signaling indicating a positive/negative acknowledgement ACK/NACK feedback delay.
  • the preset signaling is used to indicate the type of the sequence used for demodulating the reference signal when demodulating the reference signal pattern.
  • the preset signaling when used to indicate the number of demodulation reference signal ports, it is also used to indicate whether the transmission of the demodulation reference signal in the frequency domain is continuous or discontinuous.
  • the preset signaling when used to indicate the demodulation reference signal pattern or density, it is also used to indicate the orthogonal code length used for demodulating the reference signal.
  • the first communication node indicates an orthogonal code length used for demodulating the reference signal by indicating at least one of the following:
  • Signaling indicating the length of the time domain scheduling symbol signaling indicating the maximum length of the orthogonal code, signaling indicating the parameter of the demodulation reference signal.
  • the preset signaling when used to indicate the density and/or pattern of the demodulation reference signal, it is also used to indicate scheduling resources.
  • the preset signaling is used to indicate a format of the demodulation reference signal, and is also used to indicate a slot structure, where the pattern of the demodulation reference signal includes at least one of the following:
  • the time domain position of the demodulation reference signal subset the number of time domain symbols, the number of orthogonal ports that can support the maximum, and the number of subsets included in the demodulation reference signal.
  • the first communication node indicates, by indicating at least one of the following signaling, a pattern and/or a density and/or a sequence and/or a number of time domain symbols used for demodulating the reference signal and/or whether Simultaneous transmission with data:
  • Signaling indicating modulation and coding mode Signaling indicating transmission mode, retransmission indication signaling, and receiving mode
  • the pattern of the demodulation reference signal includes at least one of the following:
  • the number of time domain symbols, whether or not the information is transmitted simultaneously with the data is transmitted simultaneously with the data.
  • the preset signaling is used to indicate the multiplexing mode of the plurality of ports of the demodulation reference signal on the time domain symbol and/or the mode of demodulating the reference signal, and is also used to indicate the phase noise. Whether the reference signal exists;
  • the multiplexing mode refers to time division multiplexing or code division multiplexing.
  • the first communication node indicates that the density and/or the orthogonal code length of the demodulation reference signal corresponding to the different demodulation reference signal groups of the second communication node are different by signaling;
  • the different demodulation reference signal groups correspond to at least one of the following: different resource groups, different demodulation reference signal ports, different transmission codewords, and different transmission layers.
  • the first communication node configures, by using the high layer signaling, a plurality of demodulation reference signal parameters to the second communication node; or, by using the high layer signaling, is configured from the predefined multiple demodulation reference signal patterns.
  • a portion of the second communication node is patterned, and the first communication node notifies which of the higher layer signaling the parameter or pattern of the demodulation reference signal used by the second communication node is dynamically signaled.
  • the bandwidth for demodulating the reference signal transmission may be divided into a plurality of sub-bands, wherein each sub-band is a complete sequence.
  • the preset signaling is used to indicate that the demodulation reference signal is used on the same transmitting unit when the root sequence used on one subband of one transmitting unit is used.
  • the root sequences on different sub-bands are different or the same; the root sequences on the same sub-band of different transmitting units are different or the same.
  • the preset signaling is used to indicate that the demodulation reference signal is in the same transmission unit when the cyclic shift sequence used on one subband of one transmitting unit is used.
  • the order of the cyclic shift sequences on different sub-bands is different or the same; wherein, the order of the cyclic shift sequences on the same sub-band of different transmitting units is different or the same.
  • the preset signaling is used to indicate that the demodulation reference signal is on the same transmitting unit when the pattern number used on one subband of one transmitting unit is used.
  • sequence numbers of the different sub-bands are different or the same; wherein the code numbers on the same sub-bands of different transmission units are different or the same.
  • the first communication node uses the signaling to indicate that the bandwidth used by the second communication node for demodulation reference signal transmission supports multiple division methods according to different subband lengths.
  • FIG. 18 is a second schematic flowchart of a method for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in FIG. 18, the method for configuring a demodulation reference signal includes:
  • Step 1801 The second communication node determines a parameter used for demodulating the reference signal by receiving preset signaling sent by the first communication node, where the parameter used for demodulating the reference signal includes at least one of: demodulation The type of the reference signal, the time domain position, the pattern, the density, the orthogonal code length, the root sequence, the cyclic shift sequence, the number of ports, the number of time domain symbols, and whether or not the information is transmitted simultaneously with the data.
  • the second communication node determines a parameter of the demodulation reference signal by signaling from the first communication node for indicating a positive/negative acknowledgement ACK/NACK feedback delay.
  • the second communication node determines the type of sequence used by the demodulation reference signal by signaling from the first communication node for indicating a demodulation reference signal pattern.
  • the second communication node determines whether the demodulation reference signal is continuously or discontinuously transmitted in the frequency domain by signaling from the first communication node for indicating the number of demodulation reference signal ports. .
  • the second communication node determines an orthogonal code length used by the demodulation reference signal by signaling from the first communication node for indicating a demodulation reference signal pattern and/or density; or ,
  • the second communication node determines a demodulation reference signal pattern and/or density by signaling from the first communication node indicating the orthogonal code length used by the demodulation reference signal.
  • the second communication node passes the following from the first communication node. At least one indication signaling to determine an orthogonal code length used to demodulate the reference signal:
  • Signaling indicating the length of the time domain scheduling symbol signaling indicating the maximum length of the orthogonal code, signaling indicating the parameter of the demodulation reference signal.
  • the second communication node determines the density and/or pattern of the demodulation reference signal by signaling from the first communication node to indicate scheduling resources.
  • the second communication node determines the density and/or the number of patterns and/or time domain symbols of the demodulation reference signal and/or the at least one signaling from the first communication node. Whether to transmit at the same time as the data:
  • Signaling indicating modulation and coding mode Signaling indicating transmission mode, retransmission indication signaling, and receiving mode.
  • the second communication node receives the signaling of the first communication node, indicating that the density and/or the orthogonal code length of the demodulation reference signal corresponding to different demodulation reference signal groups are different;
  • the different demodulation reference signal groups correspond to at least one of the following: different resource groups, different demodulation reference signal ports, different transmission codewords, and different transmission layers.
  • the second communication node receives multiple demodulation reference signal parameters configured by the first communication node by using high layer signaling, or pre-defined multiple demodulation reference signal patterns by high layer signaling. And configuring a part of the pattern of the second communication node, and the second communication node knows which one of the high layer signaling is the parameter or pattern of the demodulation reference signal by dynamic signaling from the first communication node.
  • the bandwidth for demodulating the reference signal transmission is divided into a number of sub-bands, wherein each sub-band is a complete sequence.
  • the second communication node determines the demodulation reference signal by signaling from a first sequence used by the first communication node to indicate that the demodulation reference signal is used on one of the sub-bands of one of the receiving units. Different sub-bands on the same receiving unit, and/or different sub-bands of different receiving units, and/or root sequences used on different sub-bands of different receiving units;
  • root sequences on different sub-bands are different or the same; wherein the root sequences on the same sub-band of different receiving units are different or the same.
  • the second communication node determines demodulation by signaling from a first communication node for indicating a cyclic shift sequence used by the demodulation reference signal on one of the one of the receiving units. a cyclic shift sequence used by different subbands of the reference signal on the same receiving unit, and/or the same subband of different receiving units, and/or different subbands of different receiving units;
  • the order of the cyclic shift sequences on different sub-bands is different or the same; wherein the order of the cyclic shift sequences on the same sub-band of different receiving units is different or the same.
  • the second communication node determines a demodulation reference signal by signaling from a first communication node for indicating a pattern number used by the demodulation reference signal on one of the one of the receiving units.
  • the numbers of the patterns on the different sub-bands are different or the same; wherein the numbers of the patterns on the same sub-bands of different receiving units are different or the same.
  • the second communication node determines the used subband division method according to the indication signaling from the first communication node.
  • the first communication node instructs the second communication node to indicate parameters used for demodulating the reference signal, including a pattern, a density, a time domain location, a frequency domain location, and the like, by signaling indicating an A/N feedback delay. Due to the current flexible A/N feedback delay configuration is very popular.
  • the base station schedules downlink data in slot #n, and after the k time slots, that is, the time slot #n+k, the user will feedback to the base station whether the data is demodulated correctly or not.
  • test signal it is better to have the test signal at the front end of a sub-frame. If the user has sufficient time to demodulate the data, that is, the value of k is large, the position of the demodulation reference signal can be placed in the middle of the time slot, which is advantageous for channel estimation.
  • the value of k is related to the time domain position of the demodulation reference signal, the pattern, and the like.
  • the base station schedules transmission of the current time slot, and the base station dynamically configures the value of configuration k in the physical layer control channel, if the value of k is equal to 0, the demodulation reference signal will It will be sent at the front end of the time slot, otherwise the demodulation reference signal will be sent in the middle of the time slot.
  • the value of k can be semi-statically configured for higher layer signaling.
  • the base station can set a k_throushold. If the value of k is less than k_throushold, the demodulation reference signal is at the front end of the time slot, otherwise at a certain position in the middle of the time slot.
  • the k_throushold values of different users can be different, relying on semi-static high-level signaling configuration.
  • Relying on the value of k to infer the time domain position of the reference signal, such as patterns, can save signaling overhead without losing flexibility.
  • the embodiment of the present disclosure uses the k value to indicate the DMRS pattern or the time domain location, and may indicate explicit parameters such as the DMRS pattern in combination with explicit signaling or other implicit signaling.
  • the DMRS pattern can be divided into multiple collections, such as two. Implicitly indicating a certain set with a k value, and then using the dynamic information in the DCI to indicate a certain pattern in the set.
  • Figure 10a The user is configured with 4 patterns, the smaller k value can implicitly indicate Pattern 1 and 2, and the larger k value can implicitly indicate Pattern 3 and 4.
  • the user can know that it is DMRS pattern 1 or 2, and the base station needs to indicate whether it is Pattern 1 or 2 with an additional 1 bit.
  • the preset signaling When the preset signaling is used to indicate the number of demodulation reference signal ports, it is also used to indicate whether the transmission of the demodulation reference signal in the frequency domain is continuous or discontinuous, that is, the first communication node. Demodulating the reference signal to the second communication node by signaling indicating the number of demodulation reference signal ports Whether the transmission in the frequency domain is continuous or non-continuous. That is to say, whether the demodulation reference signal is continuously transmitted in the frequency domain or discrete transmission is related to the number of DMRS ports or the number of layers of data.
  • the uplink DMRS of LTE uses a ZC sequence, that is, on a scheduling frequency domain segment, the DMRS on a time domain symbol must be continuously transmitted.
  • the DMRS sequence of one user in the interleaved frequency division multiple access (IFDMA) scheme can be sent at equal intervals, similar to the uplink sounding reference signal (SRS), as shown in the right figure of FIG.
  • the delay spread is small, and in the case of high rank scheduling, the delay spread is large and the channel frequency selectivity is increased.
  • RS needs power boosting users.
  • the CS field indicator indicates that reference can be made to the chart 2.
  • the preset signaling is used to indicate the density and/or the pattern of the demodulation reference signal, and is also used to indicate the scheduling resource, that is, the first communication node sends the signaling to the second communication node by indicating the scheduling resource. Indicates the density and/or pattern of the demodulated reference signal.
  • the density of the demodulation reference signal, and/or the pattern is related to the signaling of the allocated resources. For example, if the length of the time domain unit allocated by the base station when scheduling the user is one time slot, it is better to place more than one time domain symbol demodulation reference signal in the time slot, which is advantageous for the receiver to estimate more. Pule frequency shift and frequency offset estimation. If the base station schedules users to allocate multiple slots at a time, then some slots can be placed with less reference time-domain symbols instead of the same DMRS for each slot.
  • different scheduling unit lengths configure different DMRS patterns, and one or more equally spaced DMRS time domain symbols can be used to transmit DMRS.
  • the base station If a time slot is scheduled, then a DMRS can be placed at the front end of the time slot, as shown in the upper figure of FIG. If the time slot scheduled by the base station is 3slots, only the DMRS may be placed on the first time domain symbol of the scheduling unit. Because the channel is slowly changed, too many DMRSs are not needed, as shown in the following figure.
  • DMRS patterns are shown in Figure 8 below, Figure 9-a, and Figure 9-b.
  • the DMRS is placed only on one OFDM symbol of the scheduling time unit; in the scheduling time unit, the first time domain symbol is used as the starting position, two DMRSs are placed at equal intervals; in the scheduling time unit, the first The OFDM symbols are the starting positions, and three DMRSs are placed at equal intervals.
  • the base station may configure multiple sets of DMRS patterns for each scheduling unit, and the multiple sets of DMRS patterns include DMRS configurations with different time domain densities, wherein each set of DMRS configurations includes one or more equally spaced time domain symbols available for The DMRS is sent, and the DMRS pattern used in the current scheduling time unit is notified through high layer signaling or physical layer dynamic signaling. For example, as described above, there are multiple DMRS patterns for the three slots, and then the base station notifies which type of the three slots are scheduled by signaling.
  • Equally spaced DMRS placement refers to placing the DMRS at equal intervals before the end of the data channel in a scheduling unit, starting from the first time domain symbol of the data channel.
  • different scheduling time unit lengths or data channel lengths are bound to different DMRS pattern sets, for example:
  • the scheduling time unit length or the data channel length is N OFDM symbols
  • the corresponding DMRS pattern set is 3.
  • the DMRS pattern specifically used in the current scheduling time unit is notified by DCI.
  • One or more equally spaced OFDM symbols are included in each DMRS pattern for transmitting DMRS.
  • the DMRS may be mapped in equally spaced subcarriers in the OFDM symbol.
  • n1, n2 are positive integers less than N, and the values of n1, n2 are predefined or notified by broadcast/RRC signaling.
  • the DMRS pattern can be divided into multiple sets, and different resource allocation sizes or allocation manners can correspond to different DMRS pattern sets. Including time domain, the size and mode of resource allocation in the frequency domain.
  • different DMRS pattern sets may be corresponding to different frequency domain resource sizes allocated by the scheduling unit.
  • the DMRS pattern includes four types, as shown in Figure 10a. If the resources allocated in the frequency domain are large, or exceed a threshold, channel estimation interpolation can be performed in the frequency domain, and the DMRS patterns 2 and 4 can be correspondingly, that is, the density in the frequency domain can be reduced. Otherwise it is pattern 2 or 4. After the DMRS pattern set is determined, other implicit or clear signaling indications may be required to be which of the sets.
  • the PRB binding means that the precoding used in the scheduling of the N PRBs is the same, or approximate, so that the channel estimates on the DMRS or data of different PRBs can be interpolated, otherwise the channel interpolation must be performed in the PRB.
  • the preset signaling is used to indicate the demodulation reference signal pattern or density, and is also used to indicate the orthogonal code length used for demodulating the reference signal, that is, the first communication node is used to give the second
  • the signaling by the communication node indicating the demodulation reference signal pattern or density may also be used to indicate the orthogonal code length used to demodulate the reference signal.
  • the first communication node indicates an orthogonal code length used to demodulate the reference signal by indicating one or more of the following signaling.
  • the length of the time domain scheduling symbol may refer to the length of the time domain scheduling unit, that is, the number of time slots included in a time domain scheduling unit, or the number of subframes.
  • the time domain scheduling symbol length may also refer to the number of time domain symbols included in the primary scheduling, such as the number of OFDM symbols, and may also refer to the number of DMRS time domain symbols included in a time domain scheduling unit.
  • the orthogonal code length used by the first communication node to indicate to the second communication node to demodulate the reference signal may also be used to indicate the demodulation reference signal pattern or density. That is, the base station uses some signaling to carry both the information of the demodulation reference signal pattern and the information of the orthogonal code length of the demodulation reference signal.
  • the orthogonal code length used by the DMRS is related to one or more of the pattern of the demodulation reference signal, the density, the length of the time domain scheduling unit, and the maximum length of the configured orthogonal code. That is to say, the orthogonal code length used by the DMRS is related to the above parameters, but may not be completely dependent on these parameters, or may be combined with clear signaling and these parameters to determine the pattern position of the DMRS.
  • the pattern of the DMRS may be configurable, that is, the base station may configure multiple DMRS patterns for the user, and different DMRS patterns may have different time-frequency densities or occupy different time-frequency resources.
  • the DMRS pattern set in a slot is as shown in Figure 10a. There are 4 patterns in it. The base station may configure one of them using dynamic DCI signaling or high layer RRC signaling. If pattern 1 or 2 is configured, then if the DMRS joint orthogonal code between slots is not considered, only one column of DMRS symbols cannot use the time domain orthogonal code, that is, the orthogonal code in the time domain. The length is equal to 1.
  • the orthogonal code length in the frequency domain may also require other explicit signaling or implicit indication to the user.
  • the base station informs the user that it is pattern 1
  • the orthogonal code length in the frequency domain may be one of 1, 2, 3, 4, or one of 1, 2, 4, or 2, 4 One of them must be notified to the user with other signaling.
  • the predefined specification or higher layer signaling informs that the time domain orthogonal code can only be used in one time slot, as shown in Figure 10a
  • the base station gives If the user configures DMRS pattern 3 or 4, the length of the orthogonal code in the time domain is 2.
  • the orthogonal codes used by the DMRSs of the two ports on the two columns of RS are [1 1] and [1 -1], respectively. If the base station configures the user with DMRS pattern 1 or 2, the orthogonal code length used in the domain is 1.
  • the length of the orthogonal code can be considered separately in the time domain, or the frequency domain can be considered separately.
  • the length of the orthogonal code in the frequency domain can be considered to be 4, that is, every 4 consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain are orthogonal.
  • four ports or users can be distinguished in the frequency domain by orthogonal codes of length 4, and the orthogonal codes of the four ports on consecutive four REs are [1 1 1 1], respectively. [1 -1 1 -1], [1 -1 -1 1], [1 1 -1 -1].
  • the channels are relatively similar, and the orthogonal code having a length of 4 is better.
  • This situation applies to the case where the number of DMRS ports is relatively large, or the number of users is relatively large when multi-user multiplexing. If the number of users is relatively small, or the number of ports is relatively small, the density of the DMRS is not so dense in the frequency domain, and the base station can be configured to the user DMRS pattern 2 or 4. Figure 10c. At this time, two consecutive subcarriers are used as orthogonal.
  • the orthogonal code length of the DMRS transmission is 2 or 4 can be explicitly signaled without signaling or with a small amount of signaling, because the base station can implicitly inform the user by using signaling indicating the DMRS pattern.
  • Information about the length of the code is information about the length of the code.
  • the length of the orthogonal code is determined, for example, 2, then whether the sequence of the orthogonal code is [1 1] or [1 -1] still needs to be signaled.
  • the length of the orthogonal code can be considered in conjunction with the time domain and the frequency domain.
  • the joint orthogonal code length is different.
  • the time domain can be an orthogonal code of length 2
  • the frequency domain can also be an orthogonal code of length 2
  • the length of the orthogonal code is 4.
  • an orthogonal code of length 4 can be used to distinguish up to 4 DMRS ports or users.
  • the primary scheduling resource in the NR may include one or more time slots
  • the number of DMRS columns included in the primary scheduling unit is related to the number of time slots included in the scheduling unit, and is also related to The number of DMRSs included in each slot is related. Therefore, the length of the orthogonal code that can be used in the time domain cannot exceed the number of DMRS columns included in one scheduling unit. Since the speed of the user is different, the fast user has a fast channel change in the time domain, so the number of DMRS columns included in the time domain orthogonal code cannot be excessive, even if the scheduling unit allocated by the user is long. Therefore, the base station can give the user a maximum orthogonal code length in a semi-static configuration.
  • the cross code length is the number of DMRS symbols included in the scheduling unit. If the number of DMRS time domain symbols included in the scheduling unit allocated by the user is greater than the length of the largest orthogonal code, the user transmits the DMRS or receives the DMRS according to the maximum orthogonal code length set by the base station.
  • the base station may schedule multiple time slots at a time, how to achieve maximum flexibility with less signaling is also a point of the present disclosure. If 1 bit is fixed in the DCI, it indicates whether 1 time slot or 2 time slots in one scheduling, or fixed 2 bits to indicate 1, 2, 3, 4 time slots, or 1, 2, 4, 8 time slots. . Not enough flexibility. Because for some users with large data volume, it may not need to configure 1 time slot or 2 time slots, and 6 time slots are needed, or more time slots need to be scheduled in one scheduling. So a new method is as follows.
  • the base station can configure different minimum scheduling units for different users through high layer signaling, and the minimum scheduling unit can include, for example, 1, 2, 4, and 8 time slots. Then, with less bits signaling, the user is dynamically notified in the DCI that several minimum scheduling units are scheduled in one scheduling, for example, 2 bits are used to dynamically indicate 1, 2, 4, 8 or 1, 2, 3, 4 minimum scheduling. unit. For example, suppose the base station allocates the UE0 minimum scheduling unit to be 1slot, and the minimum scheduling unit of U1 is 2slots, then for UE0, 2bits (indicating 1, 2, 3, 4 minimum scheduling units) means 1, 2, 3, 4 slots. For U1, 2bits represents 2, 4, 6, and 8 slots scheduling.
  • the maximum orthogonal code lengths of different user configurations may be different or the same.
  • the predefined time domain orthogonal sequence length of all users is the number of DMRS symbols in a minimum scheduling unit. That is to say, the time domain orthogonal code can only be used in one minimum scheduling unit.
  • the base station can be configured by signaling to the user that the time domain orthogonal code can be performed in several time slots. For example, the base station indicates that the user 0 orthogonal code can be used in two time slots through the high layer signaling, and the DCI indicates that the user's DMRS pattern includes two columns of DMRSs, and the scheduling resources allocated to the user for more than two time slots are Then the length of the orthogonal code in the time domain is 4, and if the scheduling resource allocated to the user 1 slot, the orthogonal code length of the time domain is 2. That is to say, the base station can limit the time domain range to which the orthogonal code can be applied by signaling, and then determine the length of the actual transmission of the orthogonal code by using the actual DMRS pattern and scheduling information.
  • the length of the orthogonal code such as OCC can be up to N*M.
  • the OCC length depends on the user's moving speed, the OCC length should not be too long, otherwise the channel estimation accuracy is affected.
  • the introduction of proper OCC can enhance the channel estimation accuracy, and can reuse different sequences (even if the lengths of ZC sequences of two DMRSs are different or different from the sequence), so the introduction of orthogonal codes is also very necessary. .
  • the OCC depends on the DMRS pattern and the scheduling unit length, according to the number of DMRS symbols included in one slot, the scheduling unit length, the maximum OCC length of the RRC configuration, or the number of slots used by the OC configured OCC, these three At least one of the parameters implicitly indicates that the actual OCC length is better.
  • the integrated channel estimation characteristics, standard complexity, and control signaling overhead are analyzed, and the maximum OCC length is 2 or 4. Or the maximum available time slot of the orthogonal code is 1, 2, 4 or 8 time slots. Different user ranges can be different.
  • the OCC length is equal to the number of DMRS symbols in the two slots.
  • 3 bits are used to inform CS, OCC, and Comb values.
  • the OCC mapping table if the actual OCC length is equal to 2, is shown in Table 3 below:
  • the indication of the OCC value is ignored in Table 3 above, and different DMRS ports can also be multiplexed through the CS.
  • the bandwidth used for demodulation reference signal transmission can be divided into several sub-bands. Each subband is a complete sequence.
  • the first communication node is configured to indicate, to the second communication node, signaling of a root sequence used by the demodulation reference signal on a subband of a transmitting unit, and may also be used to indicate that the demodulation reference signal is in the same sending unit Different subbands on, and/or different subunits of different transmission units, and/or root sequences used on different subbands of different transmission units.
  • the root sequences on different sub-bands can be different.
  • the root sequence on the same sub-band can be different.
  • each sub-block uses a ZC sequence.
  • the minimum frequency domain resource that can be defined for each user is 1 subband. Therefore, the user can obtain the corresponding DMRS sequence according to the allocated resource subband position.
  • the root serial number on each block can be different and will change as the slot changes.
  • a transmitting unit may refer to one time slot, one subframe, or multiple time slots, and multiple subframes. Signaling on a subband indicating that the root sequence used on a transmitting unit can be used to indicate the root sequence of all subbands or all subbands on other time slots. For example, the root sequence of all subbands on a time slot is obtained by the cell ID and the slot number.
  • the root sequence on a subband is a function of one or more of a slot number, and/or a subframe number, a subband number, and a cell ID. Therefore, the signaling indicating the root sequence on a subband is the slot number, and/or the subframe number, the subband number, and the cell ID.
  • the cell ID may be shared. For the slot number, subband number, the cell ID can be shared.
  • the root sequence on different sub-bands can change over time, so that sequence interference randomization can be achieved. For different cells, the root sequence on the subbands can be different at the same time.
  • a baseline order can be configured for the entire bandwidth of all cells.
  • the root sequences of block #0, 1...N-1 are root#0, 1, 2, ..., N-1, respectively. This order is used as the baseline.
  • Root (ns, cell_ID, block_ID) mod (ns + cell_ID + baseline order of block_ID, N) on a certain sub-band in a time slot or subframe.
  • the u value corresponding to root#n is not necessarily 0.
  • a total of 25 root values, root#n represents the #n root value.
  • the RRC signaling may configure the spec_ID instead of the cell_ID. This allows some users of different cells to configure the same spec_ID. If the root sequences are the same, then different cyclic shifts can be relied upon to achieve quadrature.
  • two or more spec_IDs can be configured through RRC, and one is dynamically selected by the DCI when the base station schedules or triggers the RS. For example, two edge users of two adjacent cells have the same spec_ID value in the spec_ID, so that if the time-frequency resources overlap At the same time, the DCI triggers the same spec_ID and configures different CS values.
  • the first communication node is configured to indicate to the second communication node, the signaling of the cyclic shift sequence used by the demodulation reference signal on a subband of a transmitting unit, and may also be used to indicate that the demodulation reference signal is the same Different sub-bands on the transmitting unit, and/or different sub-bands of different transmitting units, and/or cyclic shift sequences used on different sub-bands of different transmitting units.
  • the order of the cyclic shift sequences on different sub-bands may be different.
  • the order of the cyclic shift sequences on the same subband may be different for different transmitting units.
  • the order of the CS Field indications on each block may be different. And it changes with time. As shown in slot 0, for subband 0, the order of indication of the CS indicator is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7. If the base station informs the user through the DCI signaling that the value of the CSI Field is indicator#1(001), as shown in Table 4-1 below, then The value of the cyclic shift index corresponding to the value is 1, 5, 3, 7.
  • the indication order of the CS indicator is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 0. If the base station informs the user through the DCI signaling that the value of the CSI Field is indicator#1(001), as shown in Table 4-2 or 4-3, then The cyclic shift index corresponding to the value is 0, 4, 2, 6 or 2, 6, 4, 0.
  • the first communication node is configured to indicate to the second communication node, the second communication node, the signaling of the cyclic shift sequence used by the demodulation reference signal on a subband of a transmitting unit, and may also be used to indicate The cyclic shift sequence used by the demodulation reference signal on different subbands on the same transmitting unit, and/or in the same subband of different transmitting units, and/or on different subbands of different transmitting units, means that multiple subbands can be shared CSIfield indicates the value. In the DCI, only the indication value of a CSI field needs to be notified, and the user can derive the true CS value according to different sub-bands.
  • the order of cyclic shift sequences on each block can be calculated according to the slot number and cell ID, and no signaling configuration is required.
  • a baseline order can be configured for the entire bandwidth of all cells, such as CS order#0,1,2,...N-1 as the baseline order for Block#0,1...N-1.
  • the order of cyclic shifts on adjacent bandwidths is offset by one bit, as shown in FIG.
  • a spec_ID can be substituted for the cell ID.
  • This spec_ID can be the same as the spec_ID mentioned in the above root sequence. That is, the base station only needs to notify a spec_ID.
  • the signaling described in the embodiment of the present disclosure refers to these spec_ID or cell ID, slot number, subframe number, and the like.
  • all subbands can derive the cyclic shift sequence order on each subband based on the same spec_ID.
  • the first communication node is configured to indicate to the second communication node that the demodulation reference signal is in a sending unit
  • Signaling of the pattern number used on one of the subbands may also be used to indicate different subbands of the demodulation reference signal on the same transmitting unit and/or different subbands of different transmitting units and/or different subbands of different transmitting units The number of the pattern used on it.
  • the pattern numbers on different sub-bands can be different.
  • the pattern numbers on the same sub-band can be different.
  • the base station can be configured with multiple DMRS patterns, and the patterns on each sub-band can be different or can change with time.
  • the pattern on each subband can be related to the spec_ID or cell ID, slot number or subframe number.
  • the first communication node uses the signaling to indicate that the bandwidth used by the second communication node to demodulate the reference signal transmission supports multiple partitioning methods according to different sub-band lengths.
  • a multi-segment cascading scheme requires the entire bandwidth to be allocated into multiple blocks.
  • This scheme has scheduling restrictions for the packet service because the minimum scheduling unit is limited to one block.
  • Different users can configure the block length by RRC configuration or DCI or according to an implicit method, such as scheduling allocation mode. If the scheduling mode of the user determines that the resources allocated by the user are discrete, or the number of PRBs is relatively small, then the default is division mode 2, otherwise it is division mode 1.
  • the first communication node indicates a pattern used to demodulate the reference signal by indicating one or more of the following signaling, density and/or sequence: signaling indicating a modulation and coding mode, signaling indicating a transmission mode, and retransmission indication Signaling, receiving mode.
  • the pattern includes at least the number of time domain symbols or whether it is transmitted simultaneously with the data.
  • the indication of the MCS may be divided into multiple sets, and the Patterns of the DMRS are also divided into multiple sets, and each MCS set corresponds to one DMRS pattern set. For example, if 5 bits signaling is used to indicate that the MCS value is from 0 to 31, MCS 0-15 corresponds to one DMRS pattern set, and MCS16-31 corresponds to another DMRS pattern set. As shown in FIG.
  • multiple patterns of the DMRS may be divided into two sets, the first and the second are a set, and the third and fourth are a set, if the value of the MCS is reported to be lower than one.
  • the threshold value, the pattern of the DMRS is the patterns 1 and 2, otherwise the patterns 3 and 4.
  • the DMRS pattern can be considered as shown in the right figure, and the blank resource unit (REs, Resource) at this time. Elements) are used to transfer data, ie DMRS and data FDM. If the MCS value obtained by the user from the dynamic DCI information is smaller than the threshold of the high-level signaling configuration, the DMRS pattern can be considered as shown in the left figure, and the density of the DMRS is high, and is not frequency-multiplexed with the data. This method is especially suitable for the case where the number of DMRS ports is large, such as the port of DMRS. The number is greater than or equal to 4, as shown in FIG.
  • the base station can use the dynamic signaling of the MCS and the threshold of the high-level configuration to implicitly notify the DMRS whether to occupy one OFDM symbol or two OFDM symbols.
  • the base station notifies the user of the dynamic MCS information and the high-level configuration threshold value can also be used to notify the DMRS time domain symbol number or to inform the DMRS whether to frequency-multiplex the data with the data.
  • the different DMRS ports may correspond to different MCSs, and different DMRS ports may correspond to different MCS values. For example, if the MCS value corresponding to port 1, 2 is lower than the MCS threshold of the upper layer configuration, port 1, 2 needs higher density, that is, it does not reuse data or requires 2 time domain symbols to transmit DMRS, and the port The MCS value corresponding to 3, 4 is higher than the threshold of the high-level configuration. At this time, ports 3 and 4 need lower density, that is, frequency division multiplexing with data or only one time domain symbol transmission DMRS. In other words, different modulation schemes and/or coding schemes correspond to the density of different ports of the data demodulation reference signal. As shown in Figure 23.
  • the threshold of the MCS in the present disclosure may be configured at a high level or may be a predefined value without signaling.
  • the thresholds of the dynamic MCS and the MCS can be jointly notified to the modulation and coding mode as in the LTE, and the modulation mode and the coding mode can be separately notified.
  • the threshold of the MCS can be set only for the modulation mode, for example, 16QAM, and Regardless of coding efficiency.
  • the threshold of the MCS can also be set only for the code rate regardless of the modulation mode.
  • the base station uses the joint signaling to indicate the modulation mode and/or the coding mode configuration information and the data demodulation reference signal pattern.
  • the modulation mode and/or coding mode configuration information includes a At least one of: a dynamic data modulation mode and/or coding mode, a modulation mode and/or a coding mode threshold.
  • the pattern includes the number of time domain symbols of the demodulation reference signal and/or whether the demodulation reference signal is transmitted simultaneously with the data.
  • the base station For the signaling of the transmission mode, the base station is generally used to tell the user whether it is transmission diversity, closed-loop spatial multiplexing, or open-loop spatial multiplexing, etc., so the signaling, the density, and the like of the DMRS can be inferred by using the signaling.
  • the pattern of the DMRS can be divided into multiple sets, and different demodulation reference signals correspond to different sets of DMRS patterns.
  • the density of the DMRS can be different. It is also possible to divide the pattern of the DMRS into multiple sets, and the retransmission or the first transmission corresponds to a different set of DMRS patterns. Different retransmission times may correspond to different DMRS pattern sets. For example, the DMRS pattern of the first retransmission and the second retransmission is different. Therefore, the UE can obtain some information of the DMRS pattern according to whether it is retransmitted or the number of retransmissions.
  • a DMRS set can contain only one DMRS pattern.
  • the user may determine the DMRS pattern set or the pattern or the DMRS sequence according to different receiving mode indication signaling. For example, if the base station indicates that the user needs to perform beam scanning when receiving differently, the pattern of the DMRS may be as shown in FIG. 14, that is, the analog beams of the multi-row DMRS are the same, and the user may use different receiving beams to detect the multi-row DMRS, and then Pick a list of the best DMRS for demodulation. At this point, the DMRS of different columns may be simply repeated, with no sequence changes.
  • the DMRS pattern may not use multiple columns of DMRSs to correspond to multiple analog beams. If there are multiple columns of DMRS at this time, the corresponding sequence can be different.
  • the first communication node indicates different demodulation reference signals of the second communication node by signaling
  • the density and/or orthogonal code length of the corresponding demodulation reference signal may be different.
  • the different demodulation reference signal groups correspond to one or more modes: different resource groups, different demodulation reference signal ports, different transmission code words, and different transmission layers.
  • each codeword can contain multiple layers.
  • Each codeword has a signaling indication HARQ process, indicating MCS, and the like.
  • Each layer may correspond to a different DMRS port.
  • port 1 and port 2 are denser than port 3 and port 4. If a user is scheduled for 2 codewords, codeword 1 corresponds to layers 1 and 2, and ports 1 and 2 correspond to layers 1 and 2, respectively, correspondingly, if codeword 2 corresponds to ports 3 and 4, then codeword 1 corresponds to The density of the DMRS is higher than the DMRS density corresponding to the code word 2.
  • the density of different DMRS ports, or codewords, or DMRSs corresponding to layers in the present disclosure may be different.
  • the DMRS density corresponding to different DMRS resource groups is different.
  • the density of the DMRS time-frequency resource group corresponding to the above box is higher than the DMRS time-frequency resource in the lower frame.
  • the DMRS time-frequency resource group in the above box consists of 4 REs, while the bottom consists of only 2 REs.
  • the length of the orthogonal codes may also be different in order to multiplex with different numbers of users in different cells.
  • the orthogonal code length in the time domain can be 2, so that 2 ports or 2 can be multiplexed by time domain orthogonality. user.
  • the orthogonal codes can be used to distinguish between ports 3 and 4 by frequency domain orthogonality or frequency domain. It is.
  • the first communication node is configured by the high-level signaling to the second communication node for multiple demodulation reference signal parameters or configured by a high-level signaling from a predefined plurality of demodulation reference signal patterns to a part of the second communication node. And, the first communication node notifies, by dynamic signaling, which parameter or pattern of the demodulation reference signal used by the second communication node is the higher layer signaling.
  • the first communication node notifies, by means of dynamic signaling, implicitly or clearly or a combination of both, which parameter or pattern of the demodulation reference signal used by the second communication node is the higher layer signaling.
  • the implicit notification is that the base station uses other purposes of signaling to indicate DMRS pattern information, such as MCS, A/N feedback delay, etc. as mentioned in the prior art.
  • the clear notification means that the base station needs a clear bit to indicate the DMRS information. Or a combination of the two.
  • the demodulation reference signal can have a variety of patterns, density, sequence, orthogonal code length, etc., corresponding to different demodulation reference signal parameters.
  • Such a system can predefine a large DMRS pattern or set of parameters, and this DMRS set can contain all patterns, sequences, orthogonal code lengths, and the like.
  • the base station can semi-statically select a DMRS subset from the set through high-level signaling, and the subset includes some DMRS patterns suitable for the user, and/or density, time-frequency domain. Location, and/or sequence, and/or orthogonal code length, and the like. In actual scheduling, the base station needs to dynamically inform the user which DMRS parameter or pattern used in a certain scheduling unit is a subset of the higher layer signaling configuration.
  • the predefined DMRS pattern contains 8 patterns, as shown in Figure 16.
  • the base station can use the high layer signaling to select 4 out of the 8 patterns, such as pattern 1, 2, 3, 4. Then in the scheduling, the base station can reuse the dynamic signaling to inform the user which pattern, for example, in the DCI. 2bits to indicate which of the subsets of the higher layer signaling configuration is the Pattern.
  • the base station may implicitly notify the user of some DMRS configuration information by using other parameters, such as dividing the DMRS pattern subset of the high layer signaling configuration into two small subsets, such as pattern 1, 2 is a kid.
  • Set 1, pattern3, 4 is a small subset of 2. Implied indication by the base station through MCS signaling Is it a small subset 1 or a small subset 2. In this way, the base station only needs an extra 1 bit in the DCI to indicate which DMRS pattern is in the small subset.
  • the preset signaling is used to indicate the pattern of the demodulation reference signal, and is also used to indicate the slot structure.
  • the pattern of the demodulation reference signal includes at least one of the following:
  • the time domain position of the demodulation reference signal subset the number of time domain symbols, the maximum number of orthogonal ports that can be supported, and the number of subsets included in the demodulation reference signal.
  • the base station uses the joint signaling to indicate the slot structure and the data demodulates the pattern of the reference signal.
  • the data solution can also be said that the base station uses the joint signaling to indicate the slot structure and the data demodulates the pattern of the reference signal.
  • the pattern of the reference signal includes the number of time domain symbols and/or the number of demodulation reference signal ports that can support the maximum.
  • the pattern of the data demodulation reference signal includes a time domain spacing of a plurality of subsets of the demodulation reference signal, a number of subsets, and a time domain position of the subset.
  • the NR may support two or more slot structures, for example, support two slot structures, the first is a slot structure containing seven time domain symbols, and the second is a slot structure containing 14 time domain symbols.
  • the NR needs to support the self-contained slot structure, that is, in the same slot, the base station schedules downlink data transmission in the slot through dynamic control signaling (such as PDCCH), and the user detects the PDSCH in the same slot. And report whether the reception is correct or not, that is, scheduling, data transmission, ACK/NACK feedback is completed in the same slot. This requires a high degree of user demodulation speed.
  • the DMRS needs to be placed in the front part of the PDSCH area in the slot.
  • the last one or two time domain symbols are generally used to transmit ACK/NACK, and a guard interval of at least one symbol is required between the downlink data and the ACK/NACK.
  • the 7-symbol slot structure assumes that symbol #7 is used for user feedback ACK/NACK, and symbol #6 is used for guard interval, that is, no data is transmitted for uplink and downlink cuts. change.
  • the symbols #1, #2 are used by the base station to transmit the PDCCH. At this time, only the symbols 3, 4, and 5 can be used to transmit data and DMRS. If the DMRS occupies 2 time domain symbols, then there are very few resources available for the data. Therefore, when the time slot is 7 symbols, it is necessary to limit the front loaded DMRS to one symbol. At this time, the base station can implicitly notify the number of symbols of the DMRS by using signaling of the notification slot structure.
  • the base station can use the combined information to indicate the slot structure and the number of DMRS symbols. This indication is especially useful when the DMRS is front loaded. If the front loaded DMRS is not required, or when the ACK/NACK is not required to be transmitted in the same subframe as the PDSCH, the joint indication information may not be referred to.
  • the base station can use the information of the slot structure to indicate whether the number of symbols used by the DMRS for fast demodulation is one or two. For example, the base station uses the 1-bit DCI information to indicate the user slot structure, where 0 represents 7 symbols and 1 represents 14 symbols. If the DMRS is front loaded DMRS, that is, fast demodulation and feedback are required, the DMRS only occupies one time domain symbol. 1 also indicates that the DMRS can occupy 1 or 2 time domain symbols.
  • the base station uses the joint information to indicate that the reference signal pattern can support the maximum. Demodulate the number of reference signal ports.
  • DMRS can be divided into multiple subsets, such as two.
  • the time domain spacing of the two sets of DMRSs can also be communicated to the time slot mechanism through the combined information.
  • each DMRS subset contains the same DMRS pattern. For example, in the case of only two DMRS subsets, in a time slot containing only seven time domain symbols, the time domain spacing of two DMRS subsets is D_A, and in a time slot containing 14 time domain symbols, The time domain spacing of the two DMRS subsets is D_B, then D_A is less than D_B. Since the 7symbol time slot is shorter and the 14symbol time slot is longer, the shorter time slot corresponding DMRS subset spacing is smaller than the longer time slot corresponding DMRS subset spacing.
  • the locations of the DMRS subsets may be configured for pre-defined or higher layer signaling for different slot structures, so that the base station can use the joint information to inform the slot structure and the location of the DMRS subset. .
  • the base station can utilize joint signaling 1 bit, 0 represents a slot structure of 7 symbols, and the positions of two DMRSs are symbols 3, 5; and 1 represents 14 The slot structure of symbol and the positions of the two DMRS subsets are 3, 10 respectively.
  • the positional spacing of the two subsets of DMRS in the seven symbol slots is 2, and the positional spacing of the two DMRS subsets in the 14 symbol slots is 7, which is relatively large.
  • a DMRS subset can be viewed as a DMRS transmitted on one or two consecutive OFDM symbols, or can be a period of DMRS transmission.
  • the first subset of DMRS is mapped to the third symbol
  • the second subset is mapped to the fifth symbol
  • all ports of the DMRS are completely transmitted. It is. That is to say, the subset of the plurality of DMRSs has the same resource location in the frequency domain mapping, and all of the same ports are mapped, but differ in time. It can be seen that the DMRS pattern on symbol 5 is a repetition of symbol 3, but is mapped on different time domain symbols.
  • the method described herein can be applied to multiple DMRS subsets.
  • the patterns of the first subset and the second subset are not excluded, and the number of ports or the density is different.
  • the disclosure herein is not limited to the case of two subsets, and can be applied to a plurality of subsets. It can be easily seen that the slot structure of the seven time domain symbols supports fewer DMRS subsets than the number of DMRS subsets supported by the 14 symbol slot structures. In the case of high Doppler shift, 14 symbol slot structures often require more DMRS in the time domain, which means more DMRS subsets are needed.
  • the base station can use the joint indication information to notify the user of the slot structure and data. Demodulate the pattern of the reference signal. Therefore, the disclosure also includes that the base station can use the joint indication information to notify the user of the slot structure and the data demodulation reference signal.
  • the sequence number of the port and/or the sequence of reference signals (including scrambling sequences, OCC orthogonal sequences, etc.).
  • the preset signaling is used to indicate the multiplexing mode of the plurality of ports of the demodulation reference signal on the time domain symbol and/or the mode of demodulating the reference signal, and is also used to indicate whether the phase noise reference signal exists.
  • the multiplexing mode refers to time division multiplexing or code division multiplexing.
  • the base station uses the joint signaling to indicate the phase noise tracking signal (PTRS: phase noise tracking RS).
  • PTRS phase noise tracking RS
  • the configuration information of the reference signal of the phase noise includes whether a high-level configuration phase noise reference signal exists and/or a dynamic data modulation coding mode size.
  • the configuration information of the phase noise reference signal includes high layer signaling, and the base station uses the high layer RRC signaling to semi-statically indicate whether the user PTRS can exist. If the PTRS exists semi-statically, the frequency band of the transmitted data is proved to be high, and the phase noise is (phase noise) is likely to exist, in which case phase noise causes phase changes on different time domain OFDM symbols. That is to say, if the phase noise is relatively serious, the channel difference on adjacent OFDM symbols is relatively large. In general, when multiple DMRS ports are code-multiplexed on multiple time-domain symbols, the best case is that the channels on multiple time-domain symbols are the same or close, otherwise the effect of code division multiplexing (CDM) will be poor.
  • CDM code division multiplexing
  • the base station uses the same signaling to indicate whether the PTRS can exist or not, and indicates whether multiple ports of the DMRS are CDM in the time domain symbol. If the CDM is not available, multiple ports are preferably time division multiplexed (TDM) in the time domain.
  • TDM time division multiplexed
  • This joint information is only applicable to the case where the DMRS has multiple time domain symbols, and is particularly suitable for including at least two columns of adjacent DMRS OFDM symbols.
  • DMRS ports p#1, p#3 are code division multiplexed on two adjacent OFDM symbols, and ports p#1 and p#3 occupy the same REs at this time.
  • the OCC code used by p#1 is [1 1]
  • the OCC code used by p#3 is [1 -1].
  • the CDM can bring a code division gain, thereby increasing the accuracy of channel estimation to improve transmission efficiency.
  • ports p#1, p#3 are time division multiplexed on two adjacent OFDM symbols, and p#1 and p#3 occupy different REs.
  • port p#1 is mapped on the first OFDM symbol where the DMRS is located, and p#3 is mapped on the second OFDM symbol.
  • Ports p#2, p#4 and p#1, p#3 are similar in the figure.
  • the base station can use the combined information to indicate whether the PTRS can exist, and whether the different ports are CDM or TDM on different OFDM symbols can be judged according to whether there is phase noise. For example, the base station indicates with 1 bit RRC signaling, 0 indicates that PTRS cannot exist and different DMRS ports are CDM on different time domain symbols, and 1 indicates that PTRS can exist and different DMRS ports are TDM on different time domain symbols. In other words, the base station notifies the PTRS whether there is high-level signaling and whether the signaling that the DMRS multi-port is CDM or TDM is the same signaling.
  • the presence of PT signaling to configure PTRS does not necessarily mean that a user's PTRS must exist.
  • the UE can determine whether the PTRS is actually sent according to the dynamically configured MCS. For example, if the MCS is greater than a threshold, the PTRS is Send, otherwise not sent. This threshold is also configured for RRC signaling. If the RRC configuration PTRS does not exist, then the PTRS will not be sent, no matter how many MCS. Therefore, whether the DMRS multiple ports are CDM or TDM can also be determined according to the RRC signaling, MCS, and threshold values of the configured PTRS. For example, the actual RRC is configured with PTRS.
  • the DMRS multi-port is TDM, otherwise it is CDM.
  • the base station indicates the DMRS multi-port multiplexing mode, the PTRS-related RRC signaling, the MCS indication, and the threshold value through the joint information.
  • p#1, p#2 may be frequency division multiplexing (FDM) on two adjacent REs in the frequency domain, and p#1, p#2 are in the frequency domain. Different REs are occupied; it can also be Code Division Multiplexing (CDM).
  • FDM frequency division multiplexing
  • CDM Code Division Multiplexing
  • the preset signaling is used to indicate whether the phase noise reference signal exists when the pattern of the reference signal is demodulated.
  • the number of orthogonal ports that different demodulation reference signals can support is different. For example, for demodulation reference signal pattern A, up to 12 orthogonal ports can be supported, and demodulation reference signal pattern B can only support a maximum of 8 orthogonal ports.
  • the high-level RRC signaling configuration PTRS means that it is transmitted in the high frequency band, and it is implied that there is no need to support the pattern A. That is, the base station can use PTRS related signaling to indicate which demodulation reference signals are not supported.
  • FIG. 19 is a first schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in FIG. 19, the apparatus includes:
  • the indicating unit 1901 is configured to indicate, by using preset signaling, a parameter used by the second communication node to demodulate the reference signal, where the parameter used for demodulating the reference signal includes at least one of: demodulating a sequence of reference signals Type, time domain location, pattern, density, orthogonal code length, root sequence, cyclic shift sequence, number of ports, number of time domain symbols, whether or not to transmit simultaneously with data Instructions.
  • the indication unit 1901 is further configured to: indicate, by the signaling indicating the positive/negative acknowledgement ACK/NACK feedback delay, the parameter used by the second communication node to demodulate the reference signal.
  • the preset signaling is used to indicate the type of the sequence used for demodulating the reference signal when demodulating the reference signal pattern.
  • the preset signaling when used to indicate the number of demodulation reference signal ports, it is also used to indicate whether the transmission of the demodulation reference signal in the frequency domain is continuous or discontinuous.
  • the preset signaling when used to indicate the demodulation reference signal pattern or density, it is also used to indicate the orthogonal code length used for demodulating the reference signal.
  • the indicating unit 1901 is further configured to: indicate, by indicating at least one of the following signaling, an orthogonal code length used for demodulating the reference signal:
  • Signaling indicating the length of the time domain scheduling symbol signaling indicating the maximum length of the orthogonal code, signaling indicating the parameter of the demodulation reference signal.
  • the preset signaling when used to indicate the density and/or pattern of the demodulation reference signal, it is also used to indicate scheduling resources.
  • the preset signaling is used to indicate a format of the demodulation reference signal, and is also used to indicate a slot structure, where the pattern of the demodulation reference signal includes at least one of the following:
  • the time domain position of the demodulation reference signal subset the number of time domain symbols, the number of orthogonal ports that can support the maximum, and the number of subsets included in the demodulation reference signal.
  • the indicating unit 1901 indicates, by indicating at least one of the following signaling, a pattern and/or a density and/or a sequence and/or a number of time domain symbols used for demodulating the reference signal and/or whether Data is transmitted simultaneously:
  • Signaling indicating modulation and coding mode Signaling indicating transmission mode, retransmission indication signaling, and receiving mode
  • the pattern of the demodulation reference signal includes at least one of the following:
  • the number of time domain symbols, whether or not the information is transmitted simultaneously with the data is transmitted simultaneously with the data.
  • the preset signaling is used to indicate the multiplexing mode of the plurality of ports of the demodulation reference signal on the time domain symbol and/or the mode of demodulating the reference signal, and is also used to indicate the phase noise. Whether the reference signal exists;
  • the multiplexing mode refers to time division multiplexing or code division multiplexing.
  • the indicating unit 1901 indicates that the density and/or the orthogonal code length of the demodulation reference signal corresponding to the different demodulation reference signal groups of the second communication node are different by signaling;
  • the different demodulation reference signal groups correspond to at least one of the following: different resource groups, different demodulation reference signal ports, different transmission codewords, and different transmission layers.
  • the indication unit 1901 configures, by the high layer signaling, a plurality of demodulation reference signal parameters to the second communication node; or, by using the high layer signaling, the configuration is configured from the predefined multiple demodulation reference signal patterns. A part of the two communication nodes, and the indication unit 1901 notifies which of the higher layer signaling the parameter or pattern of the demodulation reference signal used by the second communication node is dynamically signaled.
  • the bandwidth for demodulating the reference signal transmission may be divided into a plurality of sub-bands, wherein each sub-band is a complete sequence.
  • the preset signaling is used to indicate that the demodulation reference signal is used on the same transmitting unit when the root sequence used on one subband of one transmitting unit is used.
  • the root sequences on different sub-bands are different or the same; the root sequences on the same sub-band of different transmitting units are different or the same.
  • the preset signaling is used to indicate that the demodulation reference signal is in a cyclic shift sequence used on one subband of a transmitting unit, and is also used to indicate that the demodulation reference signal is Different sub-bands on the same transmitting unit, and/or different sub-bands of different transmitting units, and/or cyclic shift sequences used on different sub-bands of different transmitting units;
  • the order of the cyclic shift sequences on different sub-bands is different or the same; wherein, the order of the cyclic shift sequences on the same sub-band of different transmitting units is different or the same.
  • the preset signaling is used to indicate that the demodulation reference signal is on the same transmitting unit when the pattern number used on one subband of one transmitting unit is used.
  • sequence numbers of the different sub-bands are different or the same; wherein the code numbers on the same sub-bands of different transmission units are different or the same.
  • the indicating unit 1901 indicates, by using the signaling, that the bandwidth used by the second communications node for demodulating the reference signal to support multiple partitioning methods according to different lengths of the subbands.
  • the above-described apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal of an embodiment of the present disclosure is located at a first communication node, such as a base station.
  • each unit in the apparatus for configuring the demodulation reference signal shown in FIG. 19 can be understood by referring to the related description of the foregoing method of configuring the demodulation reference signal.
  • the function of each unit in the apparatus for demodulating the reference signal shown in FIG. 19 can be realized by a program running on the processor, or can be realized by a specific logic circuit.
  • FIG. 20 is a second structural diagram of an apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in FIG. 20, the apparatus includes:
  • the determining unit 2001 is configured to determine a parameter used for demodulating the reference signal by receiving preset signaling sent by the first communications node, where the parameter used for demodulating the reference signal includes at least one of the following: a demodulation reference The type of the sequence of the signal, the time domain position, the pattern, the density, the orthogonal code length, the root sequence, the cyclic shift sequence, the number of ports, the number of time domain symbols, and whether or not the information is transmitted simultaneously with the data.
  • a demodulation reference The type of the sequence of the signal, the time domain position, the pattern, the density, the orthogonal code length, the root sequence, the cyclic shift sequence, the number of ports, the number of time domain symbols, and whether or not the information is transmitted simultaneously with the data.
  • the determining unit 2001 determines the parameter of the demodulation reference signal by signaling from the first communication node for indicating a positive/negative acknowledgment ACK/NACK feedback delay.
  • the determining unit 2001 determines the kind of the sequence used by the demodulation reference signal by signaling from the first communication node for indicating the demodulation reference signal pattern.
  • the determining unit 2001 determines whether the demodulation reference signal is continuously or discontinuously transmitted in the frequency domain by signaling from the first communication node for indicating the number of demodulation reference signal ports.
  • the determining unit 2001 determines an orthogonal code length used by the demodulation reference signal by signaling from the first communication node for indicating a demodulation reference signal pattern and/or density; or The demodulation reference signal pattern and/or density is determined by signaling from the first communication node indicating the orthogonal code length used by the demodulation reference signal. .
  • the determining unit 2001 determines the orthogonal code length used for demodulating the reference signal by using at least one following signaling from the first communication node:
  • Signaling indicating the length of the time domain scheduling symbol signaling indicating the maximum length of the orthogonal code, signaling indicating the parameter of the demodulation reference signal.
  • the determining unit 2001 determines the density and/or pattern of the demodulation reference signal by signaling from the first communication node for indicating scheduling resources.
  • the determining unit 2001 determines the density and/or the number of patterns and/or time domain symbols of the demodulation reference signal and/or whether by the at least one signaling from the first communication node. Simultaneous transmission with data:
  • Signaling indicating modulation and coding mode Signaling indicating transmission mode, retransmission indication signaling, and receiving mode.
  • the determining unit 2001 receives the signaling of the first communications node, indicating that the density and/or the orthogonal code length of the demodulation reference signal corresponding to different demodulation reference signal groups are different;
  • the different demodulation reference signal groups correspond to at least one of the following: different resource groups, different demodulation reference signal ports, different transmission codewords, and different transmission layers.
  • the determining unit 2001 receives a plurality of demodulation reference signal parameters configured by the first communication node by using high layer signaling, or from a plurality of predefined demodulation reference signal patterns by using high layer signaling. A portion of the pattern is configured for the second communication node, and the determining unit 2001 knows which of the higher layer signaling the parameter or pattern of the demodulation reference signal is by dynamic signaling from the first communication node.
  • the bandwidth for demodulating the reference signal transmission is divided into a number of sub-bands, wherein each sub-band is a complete sequence.
  • the determining unit 2001 determines that the demodulation reference signal is in the signaling by the root sequence used by the first communication node to indicate that the demodulation reference signal is on one subband of one of the receiving units. Different sub-bands on the same receiving unit, and/or different sub-bands of different receiving units, and/or root sequences used on different sub-bands of different receiving units;
  • root sequences on different sub-bands are different or the same; wherein the root sequences on the same sub-band of different receiving units are different or the same.
  • the determining unit 2001 determines the demodulation reference by signaling from the first communication node for indicating a cyclic shift sequence used by the demodulation reference signal on one subband of one receiving unit. a cyclic shift sequence used on different subbands of the same receiving unit, and/or the same subband of different receiving units, and/or different subbands of different receiving units;
  • the order of the cyclic shift sequences on different sub-bands is different or the same; wherein the order of the cyclic shift sequences on the same sub-band of different receiving units is different or the same.
  • the determining unit 2001 determines that the demodulation reference signal is in the signaling by using the pattern sequence number used by the first communication node to indicate that the demodulation reference signal is used on one subband of one receiving unit. Different sub-bands on the same receiving unit, and/or different sub-bands of different receiving units, and/or pattern numbers used on different sub-bands of different receiving units;
  • the numbers of the patterns on the different sub-bands are different or the same; wherein the numbers of the patterns on the same sub-bands of different receiving units are different or the same.
  • the determining unit 2001 determines the used subband dividing method according to the indication signaling from the first communication node.
  • the above-described apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal of an embodiment of the present disclosure is located at a second communication node, such as a terminal.
  • each unit in the apparatus for demodulating the reference signal shown in FIG. 20 can be understood by referring to the related description of the foregoing method of configuring the demodulation reference signal.
  • the functions of the units in the apparatus for demodulating the reference signal shown in FIG. 20 can be realized by a program running on the processor, or can be realized by a specific logic circuit.
  • each unit in the device may be processed by a central processing unit (CPU), or a microprocessor (MPU, digital processor unit) located in the device, or digital signal processing. (DSP, Digital Signal Processor), or Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) implementation.
  • CPU central processing unit
  • MPU microprocessor
  • DSP Digital Signal Processor
  • FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
  • Embodiments of the Present Disclosure The above apparatus, if implemented in the form of a software function module and sold or used as a standalone product, may also be stored in a computer readable storage medium. Based on such understanding, the technical solution of the embodiments of the present disclosure may be embodied in the form of a software product in essence or in the form of a software product stored in a storage medium, including a plurality of instructions.
  • a computer device (which may be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) is caused to perform all or part of the methods described in various embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the foregoing storage medium includes various media that can store program codes, such as a USB flash drive, a mobile hard disk, a read only memory (ROM), a magnetic disk, or an optical disk.
  • embodiments of the present disclosure are not limited to any specific combination of hardware and software.
  • embodiments of the present disclosure also provide a computer storage medium having stored therein a computer program configured to perform the configuration of the demodulation reference signal of an embodiment of the present disclosure. law.
  • embodiments of the present disclosure can be provided as a method, system, or computer program product. Accordingly, the present disclosure may take the form of a hardware embodiment, a software embodiment, or a combination of software and hardware aspects. Moreover, the present disclosure may take the form of a computer program product embodied on one or more computer-usable storage media (including but not limited to disk storage and optical storage, etc.) including computer usable program code.
  • the computer program instructions can also be stored in a computer readable memory that can direct a computer or other programmable data processing device to operate in a particular manner, such that the instructions stored in the computer readable memory produce an article of manufacture comprising the instruction device.
  • the apparatus implements the functions specified in one or more blocks of a flow or a flow and/or block diagram of the flowchart.
  • These computer program instructions can also be loaded onto a computer or other programmable data processing device such that a series of operational steps are performed on a computer or other programmable device to produce computer-implemented processing for execution on a computer or other programmable device.
  • the instructions provide steps for implementing the functions specified in one or more of the flow or in a block or blocks of a flow diagram.
  • the first communication node indicates, by using preset signaling, the second communication node, the parameter used for demodulating the reference signal, where the parameter used for demodulating the reference signal includes at least one of the following: The type of the reference signal sequence, the time domain position, the pattern, the density, the orthogonal code length, the root sequence, the cyclic shift sequence, the number of ports, the number of time domain symbols, and whether or not the information is transmitted simultaneously with the data.
  • the configuration parameter indicating the demodulation reference signal implied by other signaling is implemented, which saves signaling overhead.
  • the root sequence on different sub-bands the loop thinks that the pattern change can bring interference randomization.

Abstract

Disclosed in the present disclosure are a method and a device for configuring a demodulation reference signal, and a computer storage medium. The method comprises: a first communication node instructs a second communication node a parameter for a demodulation reference signal through a preset signaling, wherein the parameter for the demodulation reference signal comprises at least one of the following: the type of the sequence of the demodulation reference signal, a time domain position, a pattern, a density, the length of an orthogonal code, a root sequence, a cyclic shift sequence, and the number of ports.

Description

一种配置解调参考信号的方法及装置、计算机存储介质Method and device for configuring demodulation reference signal, computer storage medium 技术领域Technical field
本公开涉及无线通信领域,尤其是涉及5G通信研究方向的一种配置解调参考信号的方法及装置、计算机存储介质。The present disclosure relates to the field of wireless communications, and more particularly to a method and apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal, and a computer storage medium, relating to the research direction of 5G communication.
背景技术Background technique
目前,新空口(NR,New Radio)的物理层技术正在第三代合作伙伴计划(3GPP,3rd Generation Partnership Project)RAN1火热讨论中。而灵活高效一直是NR物理层设计所追求的目标。而物理层解调参考信号追求最大的灵活性似乎也成为了趋势。这是由于不同的应用场景解调参考信号的需求可能不同。At present, the physical layer technology of NR (New Radio) is under discussion in the RAN1 of the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP). Flexibility and efficiency have always been the goal pursued by the NR physical layer design. The pursuit of maximum flexibility in the physical layer demodulation reference signal also seems to be a trend. This is because the requirements for demodulating reference signals may be different for different application scenarios.
比如,对于高速移动的用户,在一个时域发送单元中,解调参考信号在时域上的密度应该较高,以满足高多普勒频移引起的信道时域上快变的特性,而对于低速用户,由于信道在时域上的变化较慢,那么时域上的解调参考信号可以比较疏松。如图1所示,在一个时域单元中,基站可配置给高速用户2列参考信号,而配置给低速用户1列解调参考信号。For example, for a high-speed mobile user, in a time domain transmitting unit, the density of the demodulation reference signal in the time domain should be high to meet the characteristics of fast change in the channel time domain caused by high Doppler shift, and For low-speed users, the demodulation reference signal in the time domain can be loose due to the slower change of the channel in the time domain. As shown in FIG. 1, in one time domain unit, the base station can be configured to provide high speed user 2 column reference signals, and configured to low speed user 1 column demodulation reference signals.
又比如,对于角度扩展比较大的用户,因为信道在频域上不平坦,那么则需要基站给用户在频域上配置高密度的解调参考信号,而如果用户的信道在频域上比较平坦,那么基站可以给用户在频域上配置低密度的解调参考信号。如图2所示,左图为频域上高密度解调参考信号,右图为频域上低密度解调参考信号。For another example, for a user with a large angle expansion, since the channel is not flat in the frequency domain, the base station is required to configure the user to configure a high-density demodulation reference signal in the frequency domain, and if the user's channel is relatively flat in the frequency domain. Then, the base station can configure the user to configure a low-density demodulation reference signal in the frequency domain. As shown in Figure 2, the left picture shows the high-density demodulation reference signal in the frequency domain, and the right picture shows the low-density demodulation reference signal in the frequency domain.
再比如,如果解调参考信号放置在一个时域单元的前端,解调设备就可以快速的对解调参考信号进行解调进而解调数据,即加快数据解调。但是,对于信道估计可能带来影响。而如果解调参考信号放置在一个时域单 元的中间,那么信道估计的性能会比较好,但是不利于快速数据解调。如图3所示,左图为解调参考信号放置在发送单元的前端,而右图为放置在发送单元的中间。For another example, if the demodulation reference signal is placed at the front end of a time domain unit, the demodulation device can quickly demodulate the demodulation reference signal to demodulate the data, that is, speed up data demodulation. However, there may be an impact on channel estimation. And if the demodulation reference signal is placed in a time domain In the middle of the element, the performance of the channel estimation will be better, but it is not conducive to fast data demodulation. As shown in FIG. 3, the left picture shows the demodulation reference signal placed at the front end of the transmitting unit, and the right picture is placed in the middle of the transmitting unit.
另外,为了支持调度的灵活性,多个最小调度单元聚合的调度方式可以减少调度开销。如果一个最小调度单元为一个时隙,为了减少信令开销,并且追求灵活性,一次调度中,基站可分配给用户一个时隙的资源或者多个时隙的资源。如图4所述,基站在一次调度中分配给用户1一个时隙,而分配给用户2两个时隙的资源。In addition, in order to support scheduling flexibility, a scheduling manner in which multiple minimum scheduling units are aggregated can reduce scheduling overhead. If a minimum scheduling unit is a time slot, in order to reduce signaling overhead and pursue flexibility, in one scheduling, the base station may allocate a resource of one time slot or a resource of multiple time slots to the user. As shown in FIG. 4, the base station allocates one slot to the user 1 in one scheduling, and allocates resources to the two slots of the user 2.
另外,如果基站给用户分配了一个时隙,并且一个时隙中只配置了一个时域符号的解调参考信号,那么在时域上就没法用正交掩码(OCC)来区分多个用户。而如果基站在一个时隙中给用户分配了2个时域符号的解调参考信号,那么长度为2的OCC序列就可以在这两个解调参考信号的符号上应用,这类似于长期演进(LTE,Long Term Evolution)R10上行解调参考信号。由于一次调度中,时域上分配的时隙个数可能动态变化,且每个时隙的解调参考信号的时域符号个数也可能变化,所以时域上OCC的长度就没法确定。In addition, if the base station allocates a time slot to the user and only one demodulation reference signal of the time domain symbol is configured in one time slot, then the orthogonal mask (OCC) cannot be used to distinguish multiple times in the time domain. user. If the base station allocates two demodulation reference signals of the time domain symbols to the user in one time slot, the length 2 OCC sequence can be applied to the symbols of the two demodulation reference signals, which is similar to long term evolution. (LTE, Long Term Evolution) R10 uplink demodulation reference signal. Since the number of time slots allocated in the time domain may dynamically change in one scheduling, and the number of time domain symbols of the demodulation reference signal of each time slot may also change, the length of the OCC in the time domain cannot be determined.
为了追求最大的灵活性,如果解调参考信号的时频域位置,密度,时域调度单元的长度等都在物理层控制信令中配置,控制信令的开销将变的巨大。In order to pursue maximum flexibility, if the time-frequency domain position, density, length of the time domain scheduling unit, etc. of the demodulation reference signal are all configured in the physical layer control signaling, the overhead of the control signaling will become enormous.
另外,如果NR采用ZC序列的话,一种多段级联的方法被建议。如图5所示,解调参考信号所用的带宽被划分为多个子带,每个子带上都用于传输一个完整的ZC序列,即ZC序列的长度就等于该子带的长度。该方案的好处是解调参考信号的序列可以根据分配的资源位置而得之,不会根据分配的资源长度变化。但是细节方面还有待于进一步设计以达到最大化的干扰随机化以及最小的信令开销。如LTE 36.211中所述,ZC序列的根或者根 序列指的就是LTE中上行参考信号的u值或者v值。In addition, a multi-segment cascade approach is suggested if the NR employs a ZC sequence. As shown in FIG. 5, the bandwidth used to demodulate the reference signal is divided into a plurality of sub-bands, each of which is used to transmit a complete ZC sequence, that is, the length of the ZC sequence is equal to the length of the sub-band. The advantage of this scheme is that the sequence of demodulation reference signals can be derived from the allocated resource locations and does not vary according to the allocated resource length. However, the details have yet to be further designed to achieve maximum interference randomization and minimal signaling overhead. Root or root of the ZC sequence as described in LTE 36.211 The sequence refers to the u value or v value of the uplink reference signal in LTE.
发明内容Summary of the invention
为解决上述技术问题,本公开实施例提供了一种配置解调参考信号的方法及装置、计算机存储介质。To solve the above technical problem, an embodiment of the present disclosure provides a method and apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal, and a computer storage medium.
本公开实施例提供的配置解调参考信号的方法,包括:A method for configuring a demodulation reference signal provided by an embodiment of the present disclosure includes:
第一通信节点通过预设的信令给第二通信节点指示解调参考信号所用的参数;其中,所述解调参考信号所用的参数包括以下至少之一:解调参考信号的序列的种类、时域位置、图样、密度、正交码长度、根序列、循环移位序列、端口的个数、时域符号的个数、是否与数据同时发送的指示信息。The first communication node indicates to the second communication node, by using preset signaling, a parameter used for demodulating the reference signal; wherein the parameter used for demodulating the reference signal includes at least one of: a type of sequence of the demodulation reference signal, Time domain location, pattern, density, orthogonal code length, root sequence, cyclic shift sequence, number of ports, number of time domain symbols, indication information whether or not to transmit simultaneously with data.
本公开实施例提供的配置解调参考信号的方法,包括:A method for configuring a demodulation reference signal provided by an embodiment of the present disclosure includes:
第二通信节点通过接收来自第一通信节点发送的预设的信令来确定解调参考信号所用的参数;其中,所述解调参考信号所用的参数包括以下至少之一:解调参考信号的序列的种类、时域位置、图样、密度、正交码长度、根序列、循环移位序列、端口的个数、时域符号的个数、是否与数据同时发送的指示信息。The second communication node determines a parameter used for demodulating the reference signal by receiving preset signaling sent by the first communication node; wherein the parameter used for demodulating the reference signal includes at least one of: demodulating the reference signal The type of the sequence, the time domain position, the pattern, the density, the orthogonal code length, the root sequence, the cyclic shift sequence, the number of ports, the number of time domain symbols, and whether or not the information is transmitted simultaneously with the data.
本公开实施例提供的配置解调参考信号的装置,应用于第一通信节点,所述装置包括:An apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal provided by an embodiment of the present disclosure is applied to a first communication node, where the apparatus includes:
指示单元,配置为通过预设的信令给第二通信节点指示解调参考信号所用的参数;其中,所述解调参考信号所用的参数包括以下至少之一:解调参考信号的序列的种类、时域位置、图样、密度、正交码长度、根序列、循环移位序列、端口的个数、时域符号的个数、是否与数据同时发送的指示信息。The indicating unit is configured to indicate, by using preset signaling, the second communication node, the parameter used for demodulating the reference signal; wherein the parameter used for demodulating the reference signal comprises at least one of: a type of sequence of the demodulated reference signal Time domain location, pattern, density, orthogonal code length, root sequence, cyclic shift sequence, number of ports, number of time domain symbols, and indication information whether or not to transmit simultaneously with data.
本公开实施例提供的配置解调参考信号的装置,应用于第二通信节点,所述装置包括: An apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal provided by an embodiment of the present disclosure is applied to a second communication node, where the apparatus includes:
确定单元,配置为通过接收来自第一通信节点发送的预设的信令来确定解调参考信号所用的参数;其中,所述解调参考信号所用的参数包括以下至少之一:解调参考信号的序列的种类、时域位置、图样、密度、正交码长度、根序列、循环移位序列、端口的个数、时域符号的个数、是否与数据同时发送的指示信息。a determining unit, configured to determine a parameter used for demodulating the reference signal by receiving preset signaling sent by the first communications node; wherein the parameter used for demodulating the reference signal comprises at least one of: demodulating a reference signal The type of the sequence, the time domain position, the pattern, the density, the orthogonal code length, the root sequence, the cyclic shift sequence, the number of ports, the number of time domain symbols, and whether or not the information is transmitted simultaneously with the data.
本公开实施例提供的计算机存储介质,存储有计算机程序,该计算机程序配置为执行上述配置解调参考信号的方法。A computer storage medium provided by an embodiment of the present disclosure stores a computer program configured to perform the above-described method of configuring a demodulation reference signal.
本公开实施例的技术方案中,第一通信节点通过预设的信令给第二通信节点指示解调参考信号所用的参数;其中,所述解调参考信号所用的参数包括以下至少之一:解调参考信号的序列的种类、时域位置、图样、密度、正交码长度、根序列、循环移位序列、端口的个数、时域符号的个数、是否与数据同时发送的指示信息。采用本公开实施例的技术方案,实现了利用其他信令隐含的指示解调参考信号的配置参数,节省了信令的开销。另外,对于多段级联的方法,不同子带上的根序列,循环以为,图样的变化可以带来干扰随机化。In the technical solution of the embodiment of the present disclosure, the first communication node indicates, by using preset signaling, the second communication node, the parameter used for demodulating the reference signal; wherein the parameter used for demodulating the reference signal includes at least one of the following: The type of the demodulation reference signal, the time domain position, the pattern, the density, the orthogonal code length, the root sequence, the cyclic shift sequence, the number of ports, the number of time domain symbols, and whether or not the information is transmitted simultaneously with the data. . With the technical solution of the embodiment of the present disclosure, the configuration parameter indicating the demodulation reference signal implied by other signaling is implemented, which saves signaling overhead. In addition, for the multi-segment cascading method, the root sequence on different sub-bands, the loop thinks that the pattern change can bring interference randomization.
附图说明DRAWINGS
图1为本公开实施例的数据结构示意图一;1 is a schematic diagram 1 of a data structure according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图2为本公开实施例的数据结构示意图二;2 is a second schematic diagram of a data structure according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图3为本公开实施例的数据结构示意图三;3 is a schematic diagram 3 of a data structure according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图4为本公开实施例的数据结构示意图四;4 is a schematic diagram 4 of a data structure according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图5为本公开实施例的数据结构示意图五;FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram 5 of a data structure according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图6为本公开实施例的数据结构示意图六;6 is a schematic diagram 6 of a data structure according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图7为本公开实施例的数据结构示意图七FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a data structure according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
图8为本公开实施例的数据结构示意图八FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a data structure of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
图9a为本公开实施例的数据结构示意图九; 9a is a schematic diagram IX of a data structure according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图9b为本公开实施例的数据结构示意图十;9b is a schematic diagram of a data structure of an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图10a为本公开实施例的数据结构示意图十一;Figure 10a is a schematic diagram 11 of the data structure of the embodiment of the present disclosure;
图10b为本公开实施例的数据结构示意图十二;FIG. 10b is a schematic diagram of a data structure of an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图10c为本公开实施例的数据结构示意图十三;FIG. 10c is a schematic diagram of a data structure of an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图10d为本公开实施例的数据结构示意图十四;Figure 10d is a schematic diagram showing the data structure of the embodiment of the present disclosure;
图11为本公开实施例的数据结构示意图十五11 is a schematic diagram of a data structure of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
图12为本公开实施例的数据结构示意图十六;12 is a schematic diagram of a data structure of an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图13为本公开实施例的数据结构示意图十七;FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a data structure of an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图14为本公开实施例的数据结构示意图十八;FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of a data structure of an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图15为本公开实施例的数据结构示意图十九;15 is a schematic diagram of a data structure of an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图16为本公开实施例的数据结构示意图二十;16 is a schematic diagram of a data structure of an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图17为本公开实施例的配置解调参考信号的方法的流程示意图一;FIG. 17 is a schematic flowchart 1 of a method for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图18为本公开实施例的配置解调参考信号的方法的流程示意图二;、FIG. 18 is a second schematic flowchart of a method for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图19为本公开实施例的配置解调参考信号的装置的结构组成示意图一;FIG. 19 is a first schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图20为本公开实施例的配置解调参考信号的装置的结构组成示意图二;FIG. 20 is a second structural diagram of an apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图21为本公开实施例的DMRS与数据是否频分复用示意图;FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of frequency division multiplexing of DMRS and data according to an embodiment of the present disclosure; FIG.
图22为本公开实施例的DMRS占用1列或者2列时域符号的示意图;FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram of a DMRS occupying one or two columns of time domain symbols according to an embodiment of the present disclosure; FIG.
图23为本公开实施例的不同DMRS端口对应不同的DMRS图样的示意图;FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram of different DMRS ports corresponding to different DMRS patterns according to an embodiment of the present disclosure; FIG.
图24a为本公开实施例的时隙示意图一;Figure 24a is a schematic diagram 1 of a time slot according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图24b为本公开实施例的时隙示意图二;Figure 24b is a second schematic diagram of a time slot according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图24c为本公开实施例的时隙示意图三;Figure 24c is a schematic diagram of a time slot of the embodiment of the present disclosure;
图25为本公开实施例的不同时隙结构对应的DMRS子集间距不同的示 意图;FIG. 25 is a diagram showing different DMRS subset spacings corresponding to different slot structures according to an embodiment of the present disclosure; intention;
图26为本公开实施例的两个符号的DMRS图样的示意图。26 is a schematic diagram of a DMRS pattern of two symbols of an embodiment of the present disclosure.
具体实施方式detailed description
为了能够更加详尽地了解本公开实施例的特点与技术内容,下面结合附图对本公开实施例的实现进行详细阐述,所附附图仅供参考说明之用,并非用来限定本公开实施例。The embodiments of the present disclosure are described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings.
本公开中一个时隙可以指一次调度的最小时间单元,由多个时域符号组成,比如多个正交频分复用(OFDM,Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing)符号。一个时隙也可以指一个子帧。A time slot in the present disclosure may refer to a minimum time unit scheduled at one time, and is composed of multiple time domain symbols, such as multiple Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) symbols. A time slot can also refer to one subframe.
本公开实施例的技术方案中,用肯定/否定确认(ACK/NACK)反馈时延的指示信令来隐含的指示解调参考信号的时域位置或者图样等其他参数;用调度的时域单元长度,频域长度等来隐含的指示解调参考信号的密度和/或图样。通过指示解调参考信号端口个数的信令指示解调参考信号在频域上是连续的还是不连续的。所述的第一通信节点通过指示以下一个或者多个信令来指示解调参考信号所用的正交码长度。指示时域调度符号长度的信令,指示正交码最大长度的信令,指示解调参考信号的所述参数的信令。对于多段级联的ZC序列方法,不同子带上的根序列,循环移位序列,图样可以不同,且随时间跳变。另外,可以支持两种及以上的子带长度。In the technical solution of the embodiment of the present disclosure, the time domain location or the other parameters such as the pattern of the demodulation reference signal are implicitly indicated by the indication signaling of the positive/negative acknowledgement (ACK/NACK) feedback delay; The cell length, frequency domain length, etc., implicitly indicate the density and/or pattern of the demodulation reference signal. The signaling indicating the number of demodulation reference signal ports indicates whether the demodulation reference signal is continuous or discontinuous in the frequency domain. The first communication node indicates an orthogonal code length used to demodulate the reference signal by indicating one or more of the following signaling. Signaling indicating a length of the time domain scheduling symbol, signaling indicating a maximum length of the orthogonal code, signaling indicating the parameter of the demodulation reference signal. For the multi-segment cascaded ZC sequence method, the root sequence on different subbands, the cyclic shift sequence, the pattern can be different, and jump over time. In addition, two or more sub-band lengths can be supported.
本公开实施例中的第一通信节点是指基站,小区等设备,当然也不排除其他设备。而第二通信节点一般是指用户终端等。The first communication node in the embodiment of the present disclosure refers to a base station, a cell, and the like, and of course, other devices are not excluded. The second communication node generally refers to a user terminal or the like.
本公开实施例提出的一种配置解调参考信号的方法,包括:A method for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure includes:
第一通信节点通过预设的信令给第二通信节点指示解调参考信号所用的参数。所述解调参考信号所用的参数包括解调参考信号的序列的种类,时域位置,图样,密度,正交码长度,根序列,循环移位序列,端口的个数中的一个或者多个。这里预设的信令可以是无线资源控制(RRC,Radio  Resource Control)高层信令,也可以是预定义的信息,可以是物理层动态信令。而解调参考信号的序列一般指的是PN序列还是ZC序列。时域位置指的是解调参考信号位于一个时域单元中哪个时域符号上,比如图3的左图和右图就是指不同的解调参考信号时域置。而解调参考信号的密度指的是在一个时频资源中,比如一个资源块(RB,Resource Block)中参考信号的多少.对于正交码的长度,如果是OCC码,长度是2,此时就包括序列[1 1]和[1 -1],可以依靠OCC来区分两个用户。而如果OCC码的长度是4,那么OCC序列就包括[1 1 1 1],[1 -1 1 -1],[1 1 -1 -1]和[1 -1 -1 1],可以用来区分4个用户。当然,正交码也可以是其他的码,比如DFT码,比如长度为3,包括[1 1 1],[1 exp(j*2*pi/3) exp(j*2*pi*2/3)],[1 exp(j*2*pi*2/3) exp(j*2*pi*4/3)],可以利用DFT正交码复用3个用户。本公开实施例中,所述的正交码长度为1时,即没有正交码,也可以认为长度为1的正交码序列为[1]。如果解调参考信号(DMRS,Demodulation Reference Signal)的时域符号有2个,那么可以在这两个时域符号上相同子载波的RE上做长度为2的正交,如图6所示,用户1在相同子载波上两个不同的时域符号上用的码是[1 1],而用户2用的是[1 -1]。The first communication node indicates to the second communication node the parameters used for demodulating the reference signal by preset signaling. The parameters used for demodulating the reference signal include one or more of a sequence of a demodulation reference signal, a time domain position, a pattern, a density, an orthogonal code length, a root sequence, a cyclic shift sequence, and a number of ports. . The preset signaling here may be radio resource control (RRC, Radio) Resource Control) High-level signaling, which can also be predefined information, can be physical layer dynamic signaling. The sequence of the demodulated reference signal generally refers to a PN sequence or a ZC sequence. The time domain location refers to which time domain symbol in the demodulation reference signal is located in a time domain unit. For example, the left and right diagrams of FIG. 3 refer to different demodulation reference signal time domain settings. The density of the demodulation reference signal refers to the number of reference signals in a time-frequency resource, such as a resource block (RB, Resource Block). For the length of the orthogonal code, if it is an OCC code, the length is 2, The sequence [1 1] and [1 -1] are included, and the OCC can be used to distinguish two users. And if the length of the OCC code is 4, then the OCC sequence includes [1 1 1 1], [1 -1 1 -1], [1 1 -1 -1], and [1 -1 -1 1], which can be used. To distinguish 4 users. Of course, the orthogonal code can also be other codes, such as DFT codes, such as length 3, including [1 1 1], [1 exp(j*2*pi/3) exp(j*2*pi*2/ 3)], [1 exp(j*2*pi*2/3) exp(j*2*pi*4/3)], three users can be multiplexed using DFT orthogonal codes. In the embodiment of the present disclosure, when the orthogonal code length is 1, that is, there is no orthogonal code, the orthogonal code sequence of length 1 may be considered as [1]. If there are two time domain symbols of the demodulation reference signal (DMRS, Demodulation Reference Signal), orthogonality of length 2 can be performed on the REs of the same subcarrier on the two time domain symbols, as shown in FIG. The code used by User 1 on two different time domain symbols on the same subcarrier is [1 1], while User 2 uses [1 -1].
所述的第一通信节点通过指示ACK/NACK反馈时延的信令给第二通信节点指示解调参考信号所用的参数。由于目前灵活的A/N反馈时延配置很受欢迎。基站在时隙n调度下行数据,在k个时隙后,即时隙n+k时刻用户会反馈给基站该数据解调正确与否。k的值可以是半静态配置或者动态配置。如果k的值比较小,比如k=0,那么A/N反馈和数据调度会在一个时隙,需要用户快速解调数据,此时解调参考信号位于一个子帧的前端比较好。而如果用户有很充足的时间去解调数据,即k值较大,则解调参考信号的位置可以放在时隙中间,有利于信道估计。The first communication node instructs the second communication node to indicate a parameter used for demodulating the reference signal by signaling indicating an ACK/NACK feedback delay. Due to the current flexible A/N feedback delay configuration is very popular. The base station schedules downlink data in the time slot n, and after the k time slots, that is, the time slot n+k, the user will feedback to the base station whether the data is demodulated correctly or not. The value of k can be semi-statically configured or dynamically configured. If the value of k is relatively small, such as k=0, then A/N feedback and data scheduling will be in one time slot, and the user needs to quickly demodulate the data. At this time, it is better that the demodulation reference signal is located at the front end of one subframe. If the user has sufficient time to demodulate the data, that is, the value of k is large, the position of the demodulation reference signal can be placed in the middle of the time slot, which is advantageous for channel estimation.
所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号图样时,还用来指示解调参考 信号所用的序列的种类。由于ZC序列最好是连续的发送,或者等间隔发送,且间隔最好不要太大。如果基站给用户配置的DMRS图样频域间隔过大,那么序列就可以默认不是ZC序列了。由于上行既支持循环前缀正交频分复用(CP-OFDM)的波型,又支持离散傅里叶变换扩频的正交频分复用(DFT-S-OFDM)的波型,而DMRS在CP-OFDM波型下采用PN序列(跟LTE下行DMRS采用的序列类似),2个连续的OFDM符号可以用于上行DMRS的发送以支持多用户复用,因为2个连续的OFDM符号可以支持更多的多用户。而在DFT-S-OFDM的波型下可能采用ZC序列,但是可能不需要支持多用户调度,或者不需要同时调度太多多用户,此时不需要连续两个时域符号发送DMRS。所以,所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号图样时,还用来指示解调参考信号所用的序列的种类。其中解调参考信号的图样是指是否支持2个连续的时域符号来发送DMRS。The preset signaling is used to indicate a demodulation reference when demodulating the reference signal pattern. The type of sequence used by the signal. Since the ZC sequence is preferably transmitted continuously, or at equal intervals, the interval is preferably not too large. If the frequency range of the DMRS pattern configured by the base station to the user is too large, the sequence may not be a ZC sequence by default. Since the uplink supports both cyclic prefix orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (CP-OFDM) waveforms and discrete Fourier transform spread spectrum orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (DFT-S-OFDM) waveforms, DMRS The PN sequence is used in the CP-OFDM mode (similar to the sequence adopted by the LTE downlink DMRS), and two consecutive OFDM symbols can be used for uplink DMRS transmission to support multi-user multiplexing because 2 consecutive OFDM symbols can support More multi-users. However, the ZC sequence may be adopted in the DFT-S-OFDM mode, but it may not be necessary to support multi-user scheduling, or it is not necessary to schedule too many users at the same time. In this case, two consecutive time domain symbols are not required to transmit the DMRS. Therefore, the preset signaling is used to indicate the type of sequence used to demodulate the reference signal when demodulating the reference signal pattern. The pattern of the demodulation reference signal refers to whether two consecutive time domain symbols are supported to transmit the DMRS.
其他的参数也可以隐含的来指示解调参考信号的序列种类。比如用频域资源分配的信令来隐含的指示ZC序列的长度。不同的频域资源分配方式指示不同的序列,比如如果基站利用某种资源分配方式分配给用户的资源是频域连续的,或者频域上分成多段,每段是连续的,那么这种资源分配方式对应的序列就是ZC序列。而如果资源分配方式是离散的,那么对应的就是PN序列。或者根据频域资源分配的长度来判断是否是ZC序列。Other parameters may also be implicitly indicated to indicate the sequence type of the demodulation reference signal. For example, the signaling of frequency domain resource allocation is used to implicitly indicate the length of the ZC sequence. Different frequency domain resource allocation modes indicate different sequences. For example, if the resources allocated by the base station to the user by using a certain resource allocation mode are continuous in the frequency domain, or are divided into multiple segments in the frequency domain, and each segment is continuous, then the resource allocation is performed. The sequence corresponding to the mode is the ZC sequence. And if the resource allocation method is discrete, then the corresponding PN sequence. Or determine whether it is a ZC sequence according to the length of the frequency domain resource allocation.
所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号端口个数时,还用来指示解调参考信号在频域上的发送是连续的还是非连续的。也即是说,解调参考信号是否在频域上连续发送还是离散发送跟DMRS端口数或者数据的层数有关系。The preset signaling is used to indicate the number of demodulation reference signal ports, and is also used to indicate whether the transmission of the demodulation reference signal in the frequency domain is continuous or discontinuous. That is to say, whether the demodulation reference signal is continuously transmitted in the frequency domain or discrete transmission is related to the number of DMRS ports or the number of layers of data.
所述预设的信令用来指示所述解调参考信号图样或者密度时,还用来指示解调参考信号所用的正交码长度。The preset signaling is used to indicate the demodulation reference signal pattern or density, and is also used to indicate the orthogonal code length used for demodulating the reference signal.
所述的第一通信节点通过指示以下一个或者多个信令来指示解调参考 信号所用的正交码长度。The first communication node indicates a demodulation reference by indicating one or more of the following signaling The orthogonal code length used by the signal.
指示时域调度符号长度的信令,指示正交码最大长度的信令,指示解调参考信号的所述参数的信令。Signaling indicating a length of the time domain scheduling symbol, signaling indicating a maximum length of the orthogonal code, signaling indicating the parameter of the demodulation reference signal.
或者也可以说是,所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号所用的正交码长度时,还用来指示所述解调参考信号图样或者密度。即基站用一些信令即携带解调参考信号图样的信息同时也携带解调参考信号正交码长度的信息。也就是说,DMRS所用到的正交码长度跟解调参考信号的图样,密度,时域调度单元的长度,配置的正交码最大的长度等有关系。Or it can be said that the preset signaling is used to indicate the orthogonal code length used for demodulating the reference signal, and is also used to indicate the demodulation reference signal pattern or density. That is, the base station carries the information of the demodulation reference signal pattern with some signaling, and also carries the information of the orthogonal code length of the demodulation reference signal. That is to say, the orthogonal code length used by the DMRS is related to the pattern of the demodulation reference signal, the density, the length of the time domain scheduling unit, the maximum length of the configured orthogonal code, and the like.
在NR中,DMRS的图样可能是可配置的,也就是说,基站可能会给用户配置多种DMRS图样,不同的DMRS图样可能有不同的时频密度,或者占用不同的时频资源。那么正交码的长度设置范围也会跟着DMRS的图样有关系。比如一个时隙中,如果只有一列DMRS,那么在时域上的正交码长度就是1,即不可能在时域上利用正交码来区分不同的DMRS端口或者用户。而如果一个时隙有两列DMRS,那么在时域上就可以利用长度为2的正交码。In the NR, the pattern of the DMRS may be configurable, that is, the base station may configure multiple DMRS patterns for the user, and different DMRS patterns may have different time-frequency densities or occupy different time-frequency resources. Then the length setting range of the orthogonal code is also related to the pattern of the DMRS. For example, in a time slot, if there is only one column of DMRS, the length of the orthogonal code in the time domain is 1, that is, it is impossible to distinguish orthogonal DMRS ports or users in the time domain by using orthogonal codes. If a time slot has two columns of DMRS, an orthogonal code of length 2 can be utilized in the time domain.
另外,由于NR中一次调度资源可能包含1个或者多个时隙,一次调度的单元中所包含的DMRS列数跟调度单元中包含的时隙个数有关,也跟一个时隙中包含的DMRS个数有关系。所以时域上能用的正交码的长度最大不能超过一个调度单元中所包含的DMRS列数。由于用户的速度不一样,速度快的用户在时域上信道变化快,所以利用时域正交码时包含的DMRS列数不能过多,即使用户被分配的调度单元很长。所以,基站可以半静态的配置给用户一个最大的正交码长度,如果用户分配的调度单元中包含的DMRS时域符号数小于最大正交码的长度,那么实际发送的DMRS使用的正交码长度就是调度单元中包含的DMRS符号数。而如果用户分配的调度单元中包含的DMRS时域符号数大于最大正交码的长度,那么用户就按照 基站设置的最大正交码长度来发送DMRS或者接收DMRS。In addition, since the primary scheduling resource in the NR may include one or more time slots, the number of DMRS columns included in the primary scheduling unit is related to the number of time slots included in the scheduling unit, and also the DMRS included in one time slot. The number is related. Therefore, the length of the orthogonal code that can be used in the time domain cannot exceed the number of DMRS columns included in one scheduling unit. Since the speed of the user is different, the fast user has a fast channel change in the time domain, so the number of DMRS columns included in the time domain orthogonal code cannot be excessive, even if the scheduling unit allocated by the user is long. Therefore, the base station can give the user a maximum orthogonal code length in a semi-static configuration. If the number of DMRS time domain symbols included in the scheduling unit allocated by the user is smaller than the length of the largest orthogonal code, the orthogonal code used by the actually transmitted DMRS is used. The length is the number of DMRS symbols included in the scheduling unit. And if the number of DMRS time domain symbols included in the scheduling unit assigned by the user is greater than the length of the largest orthogonal code, then the user follows The maximum orthogonal code length set by the base station to transmit the DMRS or receive the DMRS.
所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号的密度和/或图样时,还用来指示调度资源。也就是说,解调参考信号的密度,和/或图样跟分配资源的信令有关系,比如分配资源的大小包括时域长短,频域长短。比如,如果基站一次调度用户时分配的时域单元长度是1个时隙,此时最好在此时隙中放置多于1个时域符号的解调参考信号,这样有利于接收端估计多普勒频移以及频偏估计。而如果基站一次调度用户分配多个时隙(slots),那么某些slots上就可以少放置一些参考信号时域符号。再比如资源调度的分配方式,如在频域上是离散分配的还是连续分配的也对DMRS的图样有指示。The preset signaling is used to indicate the density and/or pattern of the demodulation reference signal, and is also used to indicate scheduling resources. That is to say, the density of the demodulation reference signal, and/or the pattern is related to the signaling of the allocated resource, for example, the size of the allocated resource includes the length of the time domain and the length of the frequency domain. For example, if the length of the time domain unit allocated by the base station when scheduling the user is one time slot, it is better to place more than one time domain symbol demodulation reference signal in the time slot, which is advantageous for the receiver to estimate more. Pule frequency shift and frequency offset estimation. If the base station schedules users to allocate multiple slots at a time, then some reference signals may be placed with less time domain symbols. For example, the allocation mode of resource scheduling, such as whether it is discretely allocated or continuously allocated in the frequency domain, also indicates the pattern of the DMRS.
所述的第一通信节点通过指示以下一个或者多个信令来指示解调参考信号所用的图样,密度和/或序列:指示调制编码方式的信令,指示传输方式的信令,重传指示信令,接收方式。也即是说,用户可以根据基站配置的MCS信令,传输方式信令,比如开环复用,闭环复用,发射分集等传输方式不同,数据是否重传,还有用户的接收方式不同来得到DMRS的一些图样或者序列的信息。The first communication node indicates a pattern used to demodulate the reference signal by indicating one or more of the following signaling, density and/or sequence: signaling indicating a modulation and coding mode, signaling indicating a transmission mode, and retransmission indication Signaling, receiving mode. That is to say, the user can use the MCS signaling configured by the base station, and the transmission mode signaling, such as open loop multiplexing, closed loop multiplexing, and transmit diversity, and the transmission mode is different, whether the data is retransmitted, and the receiving mode of the user is different. Get some information about the pattern or sequence of the DMRS.
所述第一通信节点通过高层信令配置给第二通信节点多种解调参考信号参数或者通过高层信令从预定义的多个解调参考信号图样中配置给第二通信节点其中一部分图样。并且,所述第一通信节点通过动态信令通知第二通信节点所用的解调参考信号的参数或者图样是高层信令中的哪一个。The first communication node is configured by the high-level signaling to the second communication node for multiple demodulation reference signal parameters or configured by a high-level signaling from a predefined plurality of demodulation reference signal patterns to a part of the second communication node. And, the first communication node notifies, by dynamic signaling, which parameter or pattern of the demodulation reference signal used by the second communication node is the higher layer signaling.
一般的,为了适应不同的应用场景,解调参考信号可以有很多种图样,密度,序列,正交码长度等,对应不同的解调参考信号的参数。这样系统可以预定义一个大的DMRS图样或者参数集合,这个DMRS集合可以包含所有图样,序列,正交码长度等。由于不同的用户信道条件不一样,所以基站可通过高层信令半静态的从这个集合中挑选一个DMRS子集,这个子集中包含一些适合于该用户的DMRS图样,和/或密度,时频域位置,和/ 或序列,和/或正交码长度等。在实际调度中,基站需要动态的告诉用户在某一个调度单元时使用的DMRS参数或者图样是高层信令配置的子集中的哪一个。Generally, in order to adapt to different application scenarios, the demodulation reference signal can have a variety of patterns, density, sequence, orthogonal code length, etc., corresponding to different demodulation reference signal parameters. Such a system can predefine a large DMRS pattern or set of parameters, and this DMRS set can contain all patterns, sequences, orthogonal code lengths, and the like. Since different user channel conditions are different, the base station can semi-statically select a DMRS subset from the set through high-level signaling, and the subset includes some DMRS patterns suitable for the user, and/or density, time-frequency domain. Location, and / Or sequence, and/or orthogonal code length, and the like. In actual scheduling, the base station needs to dynamically inform the user which DMRS parameter or pattern used in a certain scheduling unit is a subset of the higher layer signaling configuration.
用于解调参考信号发送的带宽可以划分成若干个子带。每个子带上是一个完整的序列。The bandwidth used for demodulation reference signal transmission can be divided into several sub-bands. Each subband is a complete sequence.
所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号在一个发送单元中的一个子带上所用的根序列时,还用来指示解调参考信号在相同发送单元上的不同子带、和/或不同发送单元相同子带、和/或不同发送单元不同子带上所用的根序列;The preset signaling is used to indicate that the demodulation reference signal is used in a subsequence used on a subband of a transmitting unit, and is also used to indicate different subbands of the demodulation reference signal on the same transmitting unit, and/ Or the same sub-bands of different transmitting units, and/or root sequences used on different sub-bands of different transmitting units;
其中,不同子带上的根序列不同或相同;不同发送单元相同子带上的根序列不同或相同。Wherein, the root sequences on different sub-bands are different or the same; the root sequences on the same sub-band of different transmitting units are different or the same.
所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号在一个发送单元中的一个子带上所用的循环移位序列时,还用来指示解调参考信号在相同发送单元上的不同子带、和/或不同发送单元相同子带、和/或不同发送单元不同子带上所用的循环移位序列;The preset signaling is used to indicate that the demodulation reference signal is used in a cyclic shift sequence used on a subband of a transmitting unit, and is also used to indicate different subbands of the demodulation reference signal on the same transmitting unit, And/or different sub-bands of different transmitting units, and/or cyclic shift sequences used on different sub-bands of different transmitting units;
其中,不同子带上的循环移位序列的顺序不同或相同;其中,不同发送单元相同子带上循环移位序列的顺序不同或相同。Wherein, the order of the cyclic shift sequences on different sub-bands is different or the same; wherein, the order of the cyclic shift sequences on the same sub-band of different transmitting units is different or the same.
所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号在一个发送单元中的一个子带上所用的图样序号时,还用来指示解调参考信号在相同发送单元上的不同子带、和/或不同发送单元相同子带、和/或不同发送单元不同子带上所用的图样序号;The preset signaling is used to indicate the code sequence number used by the demodulation reference signal on a subband of a transmitting unit, and is also used to indicate different subbands of the demodulation reference signal on the same transmitting unit, and/ Or the same sub-bands of different transmitting units, and/or the number of patterns used on different sub-bands of different transmitting units;
其中,不同子带上的图样序号不同或相同;其中,不同发送单元相同子带上的图样序号不同或相同。The sequence numbers of the different sub-bands are different or the same; wherein the code numbers on the same sub-bands of different transmission units are different or the same.
一般的,这种情况下每个子带都用的是ZC序列。这样基站可限定每个用户分配的最小频域资源就是1个子带。所以,用户可以根据分配的资源 子带位置得到相应的DMRS序列。In general, in this case, each sub-band uses a ZC sequence. Thus, the base station can define that the minimum frequency domain resource allocated by each user is 1 sub-band. So, users can be based on allocated resources The subband position gets the corresponding DMRS sequence.
所述的第一通信节点用所述信令指示第二通信节点用于解调参考信号发送的带宽根据子带长度的不同支持多种划分方法。The first communication node uses the signaling to indicate that the bandwidth used by the second communication node to demodulate the reference signal transmission supports multiple partitioning methods according to different sub-band lengths.
如果子带划分过小,那么会破坏ZC序列的特性,而如果子带过大,那么最小调度频域单元就过大,对于一些小包业务的用户基站也只能分配过多的资源给他们,这样会浪费资源。If the subband division is too small, the characteristics of the ZC sequence will be destroyed. If the subband is too large, the minimum scheduling frequency domain unit is too large, and the user base stations of some small packet services can only allocate too many resources to them. This will waste resources.
本公开实施例不限定于解调参考信号,例如实施例5中涉及的公开同样也可以应用到上行探测参考信号。The embodiment of the present disclosure is not limited to the demodulation reference signal, and the disclosure related to the embodiment 5 can also be applied to the uplink sounding reference signal as well.
本公开实施例同样不限定是上行阐述还是下行传输。The embodiments of the present disclosure are also not limited to the uplink description or the downlink transmission.
本公开实施例的序列也不限定在ZC序列和PN序列。尤其是对于实施例1至4所涉及的内容。The sequences of the embodiments of the present disclosure are also not limited to the ZC sequence and the PN sequence. Especially for the contents of the embodiments 1 to 4.
图17为本公开实施例的配置解调参考信号的方法的流程示意图一,如图17所示,所述配置解调参考信号的方法包括:FIG. 17 is a first schematic flowchart of a method for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in FIG. 17, the method for configuring a demodulation reference signal includes:
步骤1701:第一通信节点通过预设的信令给第二通信节点指示解调参考信号所用的参数;其中,所述解调参考信号所用的参数包括以下至少之一:解调参考信号的序列的种类、时域位置、图样、密度、正交码长度、根序列、循环移位序列、端口的个数、时域符号的个数、是否与数据同时发送的指示信息。Step 1701: The first communication node indicates, by using preset signaling, the second communication node, the parameter used for demodulating the reference signal, where the parameter used for demodulating the reference signal includes at least one of the following: a sequence of demodulating the reference signal Type, time domain position, pattern, density, orthogonal code length, root sequence, cyclic shift sequence, number of ports, number of time domain symbols, and indication information whether or not to transmit simultaneously with data.
本公开实施例中,所述的第一通信节点通过指示肯定/否定确认ACK/NACK反馈时延的信令给第二通信节点指示解调参考信号所用的参数。In an embodiment of the present disclosure, the first communication node instructs the second communication node to indicate a parameter used for demodulating the reference signal by signaling indicating a positive/negative acknowledgement ACK/NACK feedback delay.
本公开实施例中,所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号图样时,还用来指示解调参考信号所用的序列的种类。In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the preset signaling is used to indicate the type of the sequence used for demodulating the reference signal when demodulating the reference signal pattern.
本公开实施例中,所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号端口个数时,还用来指示解调参考信号在频域上的发送是连续的还是非连续的。 In the embodiment of the present disclosure, when the preset signaling is used to indicate the number of demodulation reference signal ports, it is also used to indicate whether the transmission of the demodulation reference signal in the frequency domain is continuous or discontinuous.
本公开实施例中,所述预设的信令用来指示所述解调参考信号图样或者密度时,还用来指示解调参考信号所用的正交码长度。In the embodiment of the present disclosure, when the preset signaling is used to indicate the demodulation reference signal pattern or density, it is also used to indicate the orthogonal code length used for demodulating the reference signal.
本公开实施例中,所述的第一通信节点通过指示以下至少一个信令来指示解调参考信号所用的正交码长度:In an embodiment of the present disclosure, the first communication node indicates an orthogonal code length used for demodulating the reference signal by indicating at least one of the following:
指示时域调度符号长度的信令、指示正交码最大长度的信令、指示解调参考信号的所述参数的信令。Signaling indicating the length of the time domain scheduling symbol, signaling indicating the maximum length of the orthogonal code, signaling indicating the parameter of the demodulation reference signal.
本公开实施例中,所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号的密度和/或图样时,还用来指示调度资源。In the embodiment of the present disclosure, when the preset signaling is used to indicate the density and/or pattern of the demodulation reference signal, it is also used to indicate scheduling resources.
本公开实施例中,所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号的图样时,还用来指示时隙结构,其中,所述解调参考信号的图样包括以下至少之一:In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the preset signaling is used to indicate a format of the demodulation reference signal, and is also used to indicate a slot structure, where the pattern of the demodulation reference signal includes at least one of the following:
解调参考信号子集的时域位置、时域符号的个数、能支持最大的正交端口数、解调参考信号包括的子集个数。The time domain position of the demodulation reference signal subset, the number of time domain symbols, the number of orthogonal ports that can support the maximum, and the number of subsets included in the demodulation reference signal.
本公开实施例中,所述的第一通信节点通过指示以下至少一个信令来指示解调参考信号所用的图样和/或密度和/或序列和/或时域符号的个数和/或是否与数据同时传输:In an embodiment of the present disclosure, the first communication node indicates, by indicating at least one of the following signaling, a pattern and/or a density and/or a sequence and/or a number of time domain symbols used for demodulating the reference signal and/or whether Simultaneous transmission with data:
指示调制编码方式的信令、指示传输方式的信令、重传指示信令、接收方式;Signaling indicating modulation and coding mode, signaling indicating transmission mode, retransmission indication signaling, and receiving mode;
其中,所述解调参考信号的图样包括以下至少之一:The pattern of the demodulation reference signal includes at least one of the following:
时域符号的个数、是否与数据同时传输的指示信息。The number of time domain symbols, whether or not the information is transmitted simultaneously with the data.
本公开实施例中,所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号的多个端口在时域符号上的复用方式和/或解调参考信号的图样时,还用来指示相位噪声参考信号是否存在;In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the preset signaling is used to indicate the multiplexing mode of the plurality of ports of the demodulation reference signal on the time domain symbol and/or the mode of demodulating the reference signal, and is also used to indicate the phase noise. Whether the reference signal exists;
其中,所述复用方式是指时分复用或者码分复用。The multiplexing mode refers to time division multiplexing or code division multiplexing.
本公开实施例中,所述的第一通信节点通过信令指示第二通信节点不同的解调参考信号组对应的解调参考信号的密度和/或正交码长度不同; In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the first communication node indicates that the density and/or the orthogonal code length of the demodulation reference signal corresponding to the different demodulation reference signal groups of the second communication node are different by signaling;
其中,不同的解调参考信号组对应以下至少一个:不同的资源组、不同的解调参考信号端口、不同的传输码字、不同的传输层数。The different demodulation reference signal groups correspond to at least one of the following: different resource groups, different demodulation reference signal ports, different transmission codewords, and different transmission layers.
本公开实施例中,所述第一通信节点通过高层信令配置给第二通信节点多种解调参考信号参数;或者,通过高层信令从预定义的多个解调参考信号图样中配置给第二通信节点其中一部分图样,并且,所述第一通信节点通过动态信令通知第二通信节点所用的解调参考信号的参数或者图样是高层信令中的哪一个。In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the first communication node configures, by using the high layer signaling, a plurality of demodulation reference signal parameters to the second communication node; or, by using the high layer signaling, is configured from the predefined multiple demodulation reference signal patterns. A portion of the second communication node is patterned, and the first communication node notifies which of the higher layer signaling the parameter or pattern of the demodulation reference signal used by the second communication node is dynamically signaled.
本公开实施例中,用于解调参考信号发送的带宽可以划分成多个子带,其中,每个子带上是一个完整的序列。In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the bandwidth for demodulating the reference signal transmission may be divided into a plurality of sub-bands, wherein each sub-band is a complete sequence.
本公开实施例中,所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号在一个发送单元中的一个子带上所用的根序列时,还用来指示解调参考信号在相同发送单元上的不同子带、和/或不同发送单元相同子带、和/或不同发送单元不同子带上所用的根序列;In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the preset signaling is used to indicate that the demodulation reference signal is used on the same transmitting unit when the root sequence used on one subband of one transmitting unit is used. Different sub-bands, and/or different sub-bands of different transmitting units, and/or root sequences used on different sub-bands of different transmitting units;
其中,不同子带上的根序列不同或相同;不同发送单元相同子带上的根序列不同或相同。Wherein, the root sequences on different sub-bands are different or the same; the root sequences on the same sub-band of different transmitting units are different or the same.
本公开实施例中,所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号在一个发送单元中的一个子带上所用的循环移位序列时,还用来指示解调参考信号在相同发送单元上的不同子带、和/或不同发送单元相同子带、和/或不同发送单元不同子带上所用的循环移位序列;In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the preset signaling is used to indicate that the demodulation reference signal is in the same transmission unit when the cyclic shift sequence used on one subband of one transmitting unit is used. Different sub-bands on, and/or different sub-bands of different transmitting units, and/or cyclic shift sequences used on different sub-bands of different transmitting units;
其中,不同子带上的循环移位序列的顺序不同或相同;其中,不同发送单元相同子带上循环移位序列的顺序不同或相同。Wherein, the order of the cyclic shift sequences on different sub-bands is different or the same; wherein, the order of the cyclic shift sequences on the same sub-band of different transmitting units is different or the same.
本公开实施例中,所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号在一个发送单元中的一个子带上所用的图样序号时,还用来指示解调参考信号在相同发送单元上的不同子带、和/或不同发送单元相同子带、和/或不同发送单元不同子带上所用的图样序号; In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the preset signaling is used to indicate that the demodulation reference signal is on the same transmitting unit when the pattern number used on one subband of one transmitting unit is used. Different sub-bands, and/or different sub-bands of different transmitting units, and/or pattern numbers used on different sub-bands of different transmitting units;
其中,不同子带上的图样序号不同或相同;其中,不同发送单元相同子带上的图样序号不同或相同。The sequence numbers of the different sub-bands are different or the same; wherein the code numbers on the same sub-bands of different transmission units are different or the same.
本公开实施例中,所述的第一通信节点用所述信令指示第二通信节点用于解调参考信号发送的带宽根据子带长度的不同支持多种划分方法。In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the first communication node uses the signaling to indicate that the bandwidth used by the second communication node for demodulation reference signal transmission supports multiple division methods according to different subband lengths.
图18为本公开实施例的配置解调参考信号的方法的流程示意图二,如图18所示,所述配置解调参考信号的方法包括:FIG. 18 is a second schematic flowchart of a method for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in FIG. 18, the method for configuring a demodulation reference signal includes:
步骤1801:第二通信节点通过接收来自第一通信节点发送的预设的信令来确定解调参考信号所用的参数;其中,所述解调参考信号所用的参数包括以下至少之一:解调参考信号的序列的种类、时域位置、图样、密度、正交码长度、根序列、循环移位序列、端口的个数、时域符号的个数、是否与数据同时发送的指示信息。Step 1801: The second communication node determines a parameter used for demodulating the reference signal by receiving preset signaling sent by the first communication node, where the parameter used for demodulating the reference signal includes at least one of: demodulation The type of the reference signal, the time domain position, the pattern, the density, the orthogonal code length, the root sequence, the cyclic shift sequence, the number of ports, the number of time domain symbols, and whether or not the information is transmitted simultaneously with the data.
本公开实施例中,所述的第二通信节点通过来自第一通信节点的用于指示肯定/否定确认ACK/NACK反馈时延的信令来确定所述解调参考信号的参数。In an embodiment of the present disclosure, the second communication node determines a parameter of the demodulation reference signal by signaling from the first communication node for indicating a positive/negative acknowledgement ACK/NACK feedback delay.
本公开实施例中,所述第二通信节点通过来自第一通信节点的用于指示解调参考信号图样的信令来确定所述解调参考信号所用的序列的种类。In an embodiment of the present disclosure, the second communication node determines the type of sequence used by the demodulation reference signal by signaling from the first communication node for indicating a demodulation reference signal pattern.
本公开实施例中,所述第二通信节点通过来自第一通信节点的用于指示解调参考信号端口个数的信令来确定所述解调参考信号在频域上是连续还是非连续发送。In an embodiment of the present disclosure, the second communication node determines whether the demodulation reference signal is continuously or discontinuously transmitted in the frequency domain by signaling from the first communication node for indicating the number of demodulation reference signal ports. .
本公开实施例中,所述第二通信节点通过来自第一通信节点的用于指示解调参考信号图样和/或者密度的信令来确定所述解调参考信号所用的正交码长度;或者,In an embodiment of the present disclosure, the second communication node determines an orthogonal code length used by the demodulation reference signal by signaling from the first communication node for indicating a demodulation reference signal pattern and/or density; or ,
所述第二通信节点通过来自第一通信节点的用于指示所述解调参考信号所用的正交码长度的信令来确定解调参考信号图样和/或者密度。The second communication node determines a demodulation reference signal pattern and/or density by signaling from the first communication node indicating the orthogonal code length used by the demodulation reference signal.
本公开实施例中,所述的第二通信节点通过来自第一通信节点的以下 至少一个指示信令来确定解调参考信号所用的正交码长度:In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the second communication node passes the following from the first communication node. At least one indication signaling to determine an orthogonal code length used to demodulate the reference signal:
指示时域调度符号长度的信令、指示正交码最大长度的信令、指示解调参考信号的所述参数的信令。Signaling indicating the length of the time domain scheduling symbol, signaling indicating the maximum length of the orthogonal code, signaling indicating the parameter of the demodulation reference signal.
本公开实施例中,所述第二通信节点通过来自第一通信节点的用于指示调度资源的信令来确定所述解调参考信号的密度和/或图样。In an embodiment of the present disclosure, the second communication node determines the density and/or pattern of the demodulation reference signal by signaling from the first communication node to indicate scheduling resources.
本公开实施例中,所述第二通信节点通过来自第一通信节点的以下至少一个信令来确定所述解调参考信号的密度和/或图样和/或时域符号的个数和/或是否与数据同时传输:In an embodiment of the present disclosure, the second communication node determines the density and/or the number of patterns and/or time domain symbols of the demodulation reference signal and/or the at least one signaling from the first communication node. Whether to transmit at the same time as the data:
指示调制编码方式的信令、指示传输方式的信令、重传指示信令、接收方式。Signaling indicating modulation and coding mode, signaling indicating transmission mode, retransmission indication signaling, and receiving mode.
本公开实施例中,所述的第二通信节点收到第一通信节点的信令指示不同的解调参考信号组对应的解调参考信号的密度和/或正交码长度不同;In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the second communication node receives the signaling of the first communication node, indicating that the density and/or the orthogonal code length of the demodulation reference signal corresponding to different demodulation reference signal groups are different;
其中,不同的解调参考信号组对应以下至少一个:不同的资源组、不同的解调参考信号端口、不同的传输码字、不同的传输层数。The different demodulation reference signal groups correspond to at least one of the following: different resource groups, different demodulation reference signal ports, different transmission codewords, and different transmission layers.
本公开实施例中,所述第二通信节点收到所述第一通信节点通过高层信令配置的多种解调参考信号参数;或者通过高层信令从预定义的多个解调参考信号图样中配置给第二通信节点其中一部分图样,并且,所述第二通信节点通过来自第一通信节点的动态信令得知解调参考信号的参数或者图样是高层信令中的哪一个。In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the second communication node receives multiple demodulation reference signal parameters configured by the first communication node by using high layer signaling, or pre-defined multiple demodulation reference signal patterns by high layer signaling. And configuring a part of the pattern of the second communication node, and the second communication node knows which one of the high layer signaling is the parameter or pattern of the demodulation reference signal by dynamic signaling from the first communication node.
本公开实施例中,用于解调参考信号发送的带宽划分成若干个子带,其中,每个子带上是一个完整的序列。In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the bandwidth for demodulating the reference signal transmission is divided into a number of sub-bands, wherein each sub-band is a complete sequence.
本公开实施例中,所述的第二通信节点通过来自第一通信节点用于指示解调参考信号在一个接收单元中的一个子带上所用的根序列的信令,来确定解调参考信号在相同接收单元上的不同子带、和/或不同接收单元相同子带、和/或不同接收单元不同子带上所用的根序列; In an embodiment of the present disclosure, the second communication node determines the demodulation reference signal by signaling from a first sequence used by the first communication node to indicate that the demodulation reference signal is used on one of the sub-bands of one of the receiving units. Different sub-bands on the same receiving unit, and/or different sub-bands of different receiving units, and/or root sequences used on different sub-bands of different receiving units;
其中,不同子带上的根序列不同或相同;其中,不同接收单元相同子带上的根序列不同或相同。Wherein, the root sequences on different sub-bands are different or the same; wherein the root sequences on the same sub-band of different receiving units are different or the same.
本公开实施例中,所述的第二通信节点通过来自第一通信节点用于指示解调参考信号在一个接收单元中的一个子带上所用的循环移位序列的信令,来确定解调参考信号在相同接收单元上的不同子带、和/或不同接收单元相同子带、和/或不同接收单元不同子带上所用的循环移位序列;In an embodiment of the present disclosure, the second communication node determines demodulation by signaling from a first communication node for indicating a cyclic shift sequence used by the demodulation reference signal on one of the one of the receiving units. a cyclic shift sequence used by different subbands of the reference signal on the same receiving unit, and/or the same subband of different receiving units, and/or different subbands of different receiving units;
其中,不同子带上的循环移位序列的顺序不同或相同;其中,不同接收单元相同子带上的循环移位序列的顺序不同或相同。Wherein, the order of the cyclic shift sequences on different sub-bands is different or the same; wherein the order of the cyclic shift sequences on the same sub-band of different receiving units is different or the same.
本公开实施例中,所述的第二通信节点通过来自第一通信节点用于指示解调参考信号在一个接收单元中的一个子带上所用的图样序号的信令,来确定解调参考信号在相同接收单元上的不同子带、和/或不同接收单元相同子带、和/或不同接收单元不同子带上所用的图样序号;In an embodiment of the present disclosure, the second communication node determines a demodulation reference signal by signaling from a first communication node for indicating a pattern number used by the demodulation reference signal on one of the one of the receiving units. Different sub-bands on the same receiving unit, and/or different sub-bands of different receiving units, and/or pattern numbers used on different sub-bands of different receiving units;
其中,不同子带上的图样序号不同或相同;其中,不同接收单元相同子带上的图样序号不同或相同。The numbers of the patterns on the different sub-bands are different or the same; wherein the numbers of the patterns on the same sub-bands of different receiving units are different or the same.
本公开实施例中,所述的第二通信节点根据来自第一通信节点的指示信令来确定所使用的子带划分方法。In an embodiment of the present disclosure, the second communication node determines the used subband division method according to the indication signaling from the first communication node.
下面结合具体应用场景对本公开实施例的配置解调参考信号的方法做进一步详细描述。The method for configuring the demodulation reference signal in the embodiment of the present disclosure is further described in detail below with reference to specific application scenarios.
实施例1Example 1
所述的第一通信节点通过指示A/N反馈时延的信令给第二通信节点指示解调参考信号所用的参数,包括图样,密度,时域位置,频域位置等。由于目前灵活的A/N反馈时延配置很受欢迎。基站在时隙#n调度下行数据,在k个时隙后,即时隙#n+k时刻用户会反馈给基站该数据解调正确与否。k的值可以是半静态配置或者动态配置。如果k的值比较小,比如k=0,那么A/N反馈和数据调度会在一个时隙,需要用户快速解调数据,此时解调参 考信号位于一个子帧的前端比较好。而如果用户有很充足的时间去解调数据,即k值较大,则解调参考信号的位置可以放在时隙中间,有利于信道估计。The first communication node instructs the second communication node to indicate parameters used for demodulating the reference signal, including a pattern, a density, a time domain location, a frequency domain location, and the like, by signaling indicating an A/N feedback delay. Due to the current flexible A/N feedback delay configuration is very popular. The base station schedules downlink data in slot #n, and after the k time slots, that is, the time slot #n+k, the user will feedback to the base station whether the data is demodulated correctly or not. The value of k can be semi-statically configured or dynamically configured. If the value of k is relatively small, such as k=0, then A/N feedback and data scheduling will be in one time slot, requiring the user to quickly demodulate the data. It is better to have the test signal at the front end of a sub-frame. If the user has sufficient time to demodulate the data, that is, the value of k is large, the position of the demodulation reference signal can be placed in the middle of the time slot, which is advantageous for channel estimation.
也就是说,k的值跟解调参考信号的时域位置,图样等有关系。That is to say, the value of k is related to the time domain position of the demodulation reference signal, the pattern, and the like.
如图7所示,在时隙#n时刻,如果基站调度当前时隙的发送,且基站在物理层控制信道中动态配置配置k的值,如果k的值等于0,则解调参考信号将会在时隙的前端发送,否则解调参考信号在时隙中间发送。当然,k的值可以是高层信令半静态配置的。As shown in FIG. 7, at time slot #n, if the base station schedules transmission of the current time slot, and the base station dynamically configures the value of configuration k in the physical layer control channel, if the value of k is equal to 0, the demodulation reference signal will It will be sent at the front end of the time slot, otherwise the demodulation reference signal will be sent in the middle of the time slot. Of course, the value of k can be semi-statically configured for higher layer signaling.
基站可以设置一个k_throushold,如果k的值小于k_throushold,则解调参考信号在时隙前端,否则在时隙中间的某个位置。不同用户的k_throushold值可以不同,依靠半静态的高层信令配置。The base station can set a k_throushold. If the value of k is less than k_throushold, the demodulation reference signal is at the front end of the time slot, otherwise at a certain position in the middle of the time slot. The k_throushold values of different users can be different, relying on semi-static high-level signaling configuration.
依靠k的值来推断参考信号的时域位置,图样等参数,可以节省信令开销,而不失灵活性。Relying on the value of k to infer the time domain position of the reference signal, such as patterns, can save signaling overhead without losing flexibility.
值得注意的是,本公开实施例利用k值来指示DMRS图样或者时域位置,可以结合显式的信令或者其他隐式的信令来指示DMRS图样等参数。比如一个用户配置有多个DMRS图样,可以将DMRS图样分为多个集合,比如2个。用k值隐含的指示某一个集合,然后再利用DCI中的动态信息来指示此集合中的某一个图样。如图10a所示。用户被配置有4个图样,较小的k值可以隐含的指示Pattern 1和2,较大的k值可以隐含的指示Pattern3和4。这样,如果k=0,那么用户即可知道是DMRS pattern 1或者2,基站还需要在用额外的1bit指示是Pattern 1还是2。It should be noted that the embodiment of the present disclosure uses the k value to indicate the DMRS pattern or the time domain location, and may indicate explicit parameters such as the DMRS pattern in combination with explicit signaling or other implicit signaling. For example, if a user is configured with multiple DMRS patterns, the DMRS pattern can be divided into multiple collections, such as two. Implicitly indicating a certain set with a k value, and then using the dynamic information in the DCI to indicate a certain pattern in the set. As shown in Figure 10a. The user is configured with 4 patterns, the smaller k value can implicitly indicate Pattern 1 and 2, and the larger k value can implicitly indicate Pattern 3 and 4. Thus, if k=0, then the user can know that it is DMRS pattern 1 or 2, and the base station needs to indicate whether it is Pattern 1 or 2 with an additional 1 bit.
实施例2Example 2
所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号端口个数时,还用来指示解调参考信号在频域上的发送是连续的还是非连续的,也即所述的第一通信节点通过指示解调参考信号端口个数的信令给第二通信节点指示解调参考信 号在频域上的发送是连续的还是非连续的。也即是说,解调参考信号是否在频域上连续发送还是离散发送跟DMRS端口数或者数据的层数有关系。When the preset signaling is used to indicate the number of demodulation reference signal ports, it is also used to indicate whether the transmission of the demodulation reference signal in the frequency domain is continuous or discontinuous, that is, the first communication node. Demodulating the reference signal to the second communication node by signaling indicating the number of demodulation reference signal ports Whether the transmission in the frequency domain is continuous or non-continuous. That is to say, whether the demodulation reference signal is continuously transmitted in the frequency domain or discrete transmission is related to the number of DMRS ports or the number of layers of data.
LTE的上行DMRS用的是ZC序列,即在一个调度频域段上,一个时域符号上DMRS必须是连续发送的。而基于交织的频分多址(IFDMA)方案中一个用户的DMRS序列可以等间隔发送,类似于上行的探测参考信号(SRS,Sounding Reference Signal)发送,如图2右图所示。The uplink DMRS of LTE uses a ZC sequence, that is, on a scheduling frequency domain segment, the DMRS on a time domain symbol must be continuously transmitted. The DMRS sequence of one user in the interleaved frequency division multiple access (IFDMA) scheme can be sent at equal intervals, similar to the uplink sounding reference signal (SRS), as shown in the right figure of FIG.
一般的,做低rank调度时,延迟扩展(delay spread)较小,而高rank调度时,delay spread较大,信道频率选择性会增加。Generally, when performing low rank scheduling, the delay spread is small, and in the case of high rank scheduling, the delay spread is large and the channel frequency selectivity is increased.
对于一些delay spread比较小,且rank比较小,RS需要power boosting的用户,比如对于上行,rank<=2时,可以采用IFDMA方案,即不连续发送;rank=3or 4,可以采用连续的DRMS方案。这是因为rank=4时,连续发送假定的是每4个频域连续的RE中信道相同来做正交,而如果用IFDMA方案,就得假定每8个连续的RE信道相同来做正交。For some delay spreads are small, and the rank is relatively small, RS needs power boosting users. For example, for uplink, when rank<=2, IFDMA scheme can be used, that is, discontinuous transmission; rank=3or 4, continuous DRMS scheme can be adopted. . This is because when rank=4, continuous transmission assumes that the channels in each of the four consecutive frequency domains are the same for orthogonality, and if the IFDMA scheme is used, it is assumed that every eight consecutive RE channels are identical to be orthogonal. .
例如,如果DCI中通知用户DMRS port>=3,即表示DMRS在频域上连续发送,那么CS field indicator指示可以参考图表2。而如果DMRS port<=2,那么表示DMRS在频域上使用IFDMA方案,参考表1。因为表1中CS指示重复了。其中comb#0指DMRS参考信号占用偶数子载波,而comb#1表示参考信号占用奇数子载波。
Figure PCTCN2017078110-appb-000001
指的是cyclic shift,意义与LTE中相同。
For example, if the DCI is notified in the DCI that the DMRS port>=3, that is, the DMRS is continuously transmitted in the frequency domain, the CS field indicator indicates that reference can be made to the chart 2. If DMRS port<=2, it means that the DMRS uses the IFDMA scheme in the frequency domain, refer to Table 1. Because the CS indication in Table 1 is repeated. Where comb## indicates that the DMRS reference signal occupies an even subcarrier, and comb#1 indicates that the reference signal occupies an odd subcarrier.
Figure PCTCN2017078110-appb-000001
Refers to the cyclic shift, the meaning is the same as in LTE.
Figure PCTCN2017078110-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2017078110-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2017078110-appb-000003
Figure PCTCN2017078110-appb-000003
表1Table 1
Figure PCTCN2017078110-appb-000004
Figure PCTCN2017078110-appb-000004
表2Table 2
实施例3Example 3
所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号的密度和/或图样时,还用来指示调度资源,也即所述的第一通信节点通过指示调度资源的信令给第二通信节点指示解调参考信号的密度和/或图样。The preset signaling is used to indicate the density and/or the pattern of the demodulation reference signal, and is also used to indicate the scheduling resource, that is, the first communication node sends the signaling to the second communication node by indicating the scheduling resource. Indicates the density and/or pattern of the demodulated reference signal.
也就是说,解调参考信号的密度,和/或图样跟分配资源的信令有关系。比如,如果基站一次调度用户时分配的时域单元长度是1个时隙,此时最好在此时隙中放置多于1个时域符号的解调参考信号,这样有利于接收端估计多普勒频移以及频偏估计。而如果基站一次调度用户分配多个slots,那么某些slots上就可以少放置一些参考信号时域符号,而不是每个slot的DMRS都一样。That is, the density of the demodulation reference signal, and/or the pattern is related to the signaling of the allocated resources. For example, if the length of the time domain unit allocated by the base station when scheduling the user is one time slot, it is better to place more than one time domain symbol demodulation reference signal in the time slot, which is advantageous for the receiver to estimate more. Pule frequency shift and frequency offset estimation. If the base station schedules users to allocate multiple slots at a time, then some slots can be placed with less reference time-domain symbols instead of the same DMRS for each slot.
例如不同的调度单元长度配置不同的DMRS图样,一个或多个等间隔放置的DMRS时域符号可用于发送DMRS。如果用户信道比较慢变,基站 如果调度一个时隙,那么一个DMRS可以放置在时隙前端,如图8上图。而如果基站调度的时隙是3slots,仅在调度单元的第一个时域符号上放置DMRS即可,因为信道慢变,不需要太多的DMRS,如图8下图。For example, different scheduling unit lengths configure different DMRS patterns, and one or more equally spaced DMRS time domain symbols can be used to transmit DMRS. If the user channel is slower, the base station If a time slot is scheduled, then a DMRS can be placed at the front end of the time slot, as shown in the upper figure of FIG. If the time slot scheduled by the base station is 3slots, only the DMRS may be placed on the first time domain symbol of the scheduling unit. Because the channel is slowly changed, too many DMRSs are not needed, as shown in the following figure.
多种DMRS图样如图8下图,图9-a,图9-b所示。分别是仅在调度时间单元的一个OFDM符号上放置DMRS;在调度时间单元内,以第一个时域符号为起始位置,等间隔地放置两个DMRS;在调度时间单元内,以第一个OFDM符号为起始位置,等间隔地放置三个DMRS。A variety of DMRS patterns are shown in Figure 8 below, Figure 9-a, and Figure 9-b. The DMRS is placed only on one OFDM symbol of the scheduling time unit; in the scheduling time unit, the first time domain symbol is used as the starting position, two DMRSs are placed at equal intervals; in the scheduling time unit, the first The OFDM symbols are the starting positions, and three DMRSs are placed at equal intervals.
可选的,基站可为每个调度单元配置多套DMRS图样,多套DMRS图样包括不同时域密度的DMRS配置,其中每套DMRS配置中包含一个或多个等间隔放置的时域符号可用于发送DMRS,通过高层信令或者物理层动态信令通知当前调度时间单元中所采用的DMRS pattern。比如如上所述,3个slots时有多种DMRS pattern,然后基站通过信令通知调度3个slots时是哪一种图样。等间隔的DMRS放置是指以数据信道的第一个时域符号为起始位置,在一个调度单元中以数据信道结束位置之前等间隔放置DMRS。Optionally, the base station may configure multiple sets of DMRS patterns for each scheduling unit, and the multiple sets of DMRS patterns include DMRS configurations with different time domain densities, wherein each set of DMRS configurations includes one or more equally spaced time domain symbols available for The DMRS is sent, and the DMRS pattern used in the current scheduling time unit is notified through high layer signaling or physical layer dynamic signaling. For example, as described above, there are multiple DMRS patterns for the three slots, and then the base station notifies which type of the three slots are scheduled by signaling. Equally spaced DMRS placement refers to placing the DMRS at equal intervals before the end of the data channel in a scheduling unit, starting from the first time domain symbol of the data channel.
又例如不同的调度时间单元长度或数据信道长度与不同的DMRS pattern集合之间绑定,例如:For example, different scheduling time unit lengths or data channel lengths are bound to different DMRS pattern sets, for example:
假设调度时间单元长度或数据信道长度为N个OFDM符号,It is assumed that the scheduling time unit length or the data channel length is N OFDM symbols,
当调度时间单元/数据信道长度为[1,n1]个OFDM符号时,对应DMRS pattern集合1;When the scheduling time unit/data channel length is [1, n1] OFDM symbols, corresponding to the DMRS pattern set 1;
当调度时间单元/数据信道长度为[n1+1,n2]个OFDM符号时,对应DMRS pattern集合2;When the scheduling time unit/data channel length is [n1+1, n2] OFDM symbols, corresponding to the DMRS pattern set 2;
当调度时间单元/数据信道长度为[n2+1,N]个OFDM符号时,对应DMRS pattern集合3。When the scheduling time unit/data channel length is [n2+1, N] OFDM symbols, the corresponding DMRS pattern set is 3.
在每种DMRS pattern集合下,再通过DCI通知当前调度时间单元中具体使用的DMRS pattern。 Under each DMRS pattern set, the DMRS pattern specifically used in the current scheduling time unit is notified by DCI.
每种DMRS pattern集合中包括至少一种DMRS pattern;Include at least one DMRS pattern in each DMRS pattern set;
每种DMRS pattern中包括一个或多个等间隔放置的OFDM符号用于发送DMRS,优选地,所述OFDM符号中可以以等间隔子载波的方式映射DMRS。One or more equally spaced OFDM symbols are included in each DMRS pattern for transmitting DMRS. Preferably, the DMRS may be mapped in equally spaced subcarriers in the OFDM symbol.
其中n1,n2为小于N的正整数,n1,n2的值为预定义的,或者通过广播/RRC信令通知。Where n1, n2 are positive integers less than N, and the values of n1, n2 are predefined or notified by broadcast/RRC signaling.
可以将DMRS图样分成多个集合,不同的资源分配大小或者分配方式可以对应不同的DMRS图样集合。包括时域,频域分配资源的大小和方式。The DMRS pattern can be divided into multiple sets, and different resource allocation sizes or allocation manners can correspond to different DMRS pattern sets. Including time domain, the size and mode of resource allocation in the frequency domain.
例如,对于如果调度单元分配的频域资源大小不同也可以对应不同的DMRS pattern集合。比如,DMRS的图样包括4种,如图10a所示。如果频域上分配的资源较大,或者超过一个门限,那么频域上可以做信道估计插值,此时可以对应DMRS的图样2、4,即频域上密度可以降低。否则就是图样2或者4。DMRS图样集合确定后,可能还需要其他隐含的或者清晰的信令指示是集合中的哪个。For example, different DMRS pattern sets may be corresponding to different frequency domain resource sizes allocated by the scheduling unit. For example, the DMRS pattern includes four types, as shown in Figure 10a. If the resources allocated in the frequency domain are large, or exceed a threshold, channel estimation interpolation can be performed in the frequency domain, and the DMRS patterns 2 and 4 can be correspondingly, that is, the density in the frequency domain can be reduced. Otherwise it is pattern 2 or 4. After the DMRS pattern set is determined, other implicit or clear signaling indications may be required to be which of the sets.
另外,调度时是否做PRB绑定,绑定的PRB长度是多少也可以用来隐含的指示DMRS的图样。PRB绑定是指在N个PRB内调度使用的预编码是一样的,或者近似的,这样不同PRB的DMRS或者数据上的信道估计就可以用插值了,否者必须在PRB内做信道插值。In addition, whether to perform PRB binding during scheduling, and the length of the bound PRB can also be used to implicitly indicate the DMRS pattern. The PRB binding means that the precoding used in the scheduling of the N PRBs is the same, or approximate, so that the channel estimates on the DMRS or data of different PRBs can be interpolated, otherwise the channel interpolation must be performed in the PRB.
实施例4Example 4
所述预设的信令用来指示所述解调参考信号图样或者密度时,还用来指示解调参考信号所用的正交码长度,也即所述的第一通信节点用于给第二通信节点指示所述解调参考信号图样或者密度的信令还可以用来指示解调参考信号所用的正交码长度。The preset signaling is used to indicate the demodulation reference signal pattern or density, and is also used to indicate the orthogonal code length used for demodulating the reference signal, that is, the first communication node is used to give the second The signaling by the communication node indicating the demodulation reference signal pattern or density may also be used to indicate the orthogonal code length used to demodulate the reference signal.
所述的第一通信节点通过指示以下一个或者多个信令来指示解调参考信号所用的正交码长度。 The first communication node indicates an orthogonal code length used to demodulate the reference signal by indicating one or more of the following signaling.
指示时域调度符号长度的信令,指示正交码最大长度的信令,指示解调参考信号的所述参数的信令。时域调度符号长度可以指的是时域调度单元的长度,即一个时域调度单元包含的时隙个数,或者子帧个数。时域调度符号长度也可以指一次调度中包含的时域符号个数,比如OFDM符号数,也可以指一个时域调度单元中包含的DMRS时域符号个数。Signaling indicating a length of the time domain scheduling symbol, signaling indicating a maximum length of the orthogonal code, signaling indicating the parameter of the demodulation reference signal. The length of the time domain scheduling symbol may refer to the length of the time domain scheduling unit, that is, the number of time slots included in a time domain scheduling unit, or the number of subframes. The time domain scheduling symbol length may also refer to the number of time domain symbols included in the primary scheduling, such as the number of OFDM symbols, and may also refer to the number of DMRS time domain symbols included in a time domain scheduling unit.
或者也可以说是,所述的第一通信节点用于给第二通信节点指示解调参考信号所用的正交码长度还可以用来指示所述解调参考信号图样或者密度。即基站用一些信令既携带解调参考信号图样的信息同时也携带解调参考信号正交码长度的信息。Or it may be said that the orthogonal code length used by the first communication node to indicate to the second communication node to demodulate the reference signal may also be used to indicate the demodulation reference signal pattern or density. That is, the base station uses some signaling to carry both the information of the demodulation reference signal pattern and the information of the orthogonal code length of the demodulation reference signal.
也就是说,DMRS所用到的正交码长度跟解调参考信号的图样,密度,时域调度单元的长度,配置的正交码最大的长度等一个或者多个有关系。也就是说,DMRS用的正交码长度跟上述的参数有关,但是不一定完全依赖于这些参数,也可能是结合清晰的信令和这些参数来确定DMRS的图样位置等。That is to say, the orthogonal code length used by the DMRS is related to one or more of the pattern of the demodulation reference signal, the density, the length of the time domain scheduling unit, and the maximum length of the configured orthogonal code. That is to say, the orthogonal code length used by the DMRS is related to the above parameters, but may not be completely dependent on these parameters, or may be combined with clear signaling and these parameters to determine the pattern position of the DMRS.
在NR中,DMRS的图样可能是可配置的,也就是说,基站可能会给用户配置多种DMRS图样,不同的DMRS图样可能有不同的时频密度,或者占用不同的时频资源。比如一个slot中的DMRS图样集合如图10a所示,共有4中图样。基站可能利用动态的DCI信令或者高层RRC信令配置其中1个。如果配置的是pattern 1或者2,那么如果不考虑时隙之间的DMRS联合用正交码的话,只有一列DMRS符号就没法利用时域正交码,也就是说时域上正交码的长度等于1。而此时,频域上的正交码长度可能还需要其他显式的信令或者隐式的指示给用户。比如如果基站通知给用户是pattern 1,那么频域上的正交码长度是可能是1,2,3,4中的一个,或者是1,2,4中的一个,或者是2,4中的一个,得用其他信令通知给用户。如果预定义的规定或者高层信令通知时域正交码只能在一个时隙内用,如图10a,如果基站给 用户配置的是DMRS pattern 3或者4,那么时域上正交码的长度就是2。两个端口的DMRS在两列RS上用的正交码分别是[1 1]和[1 -1]。而如果基站给用户配置的是DMRS pattern 1或者2,那时域上用的正交码长度就是1。In the NR, the pattern of the DMRS may be configurable, that is, the base station may configure multiple DMRS patterns for the user, and different DMRS patterns may have different time-frequency densities or occupy different time-frequency resources. For example, the DMRS pattern set in a slot is as shown in Figure 10a. There are 4 patterns in it. The base station may configure one of them using dynamic DCI signaling or high layer RRC signaling. If pattern 1 or 2 is configured, then if the DMRS joint orthogonal code between slots is not considered, only one column of DMRS symbols cannot use the time domain orthogonal code, that is, the orthogonal code in the time domain. The length is equal to 1. At this time, the orthogonal code length in the frequency domain may also require other explicit signaling or implicit indication to the user. For example, if the base station informs the user that it is pattern 1, the orthogonal code length in the frequency domain may be one of 1, 2, 3, 4, or one of 1, 2, 4, or 2, 4 One of them must be notified to the user with other signaling. If the predefined specification or higher layer signaling informs that the time domain orthogonal code can only be used in one time slot, as shown in Figure 10a, if the base station gives If the user configures DMRS pattern 3 or 4, the length of the orthogonal code in the time domain is 2. The orthogonal codes used by the DMRSs of the two ports on the two columns of RS are [1 1] and [1 -1], respectively. If the base station configures the user with DMRS pattern 1 or 2, the orthogonal code length used in the domain is 1.
正交码的长度可以单独考虑时域,也可以单独考虑频域。如图10a所示,如果基站配置给用户的pattern 1或者3,可以认为频域上正交码的长度为4,即频域上每4个连续的子载波做正交。如图10b所示,4个端口或者用户可以做靠长度为4的正交码在频域上区分,4个端口在连续的4个RE上的正交码分别是[1 1 1 1],[1 -1 1 -1],[1 -1 -1 1],[1 1 -1 -1]。因为这4个RE是频域连续的,所以信道比较近似,利用长度为4的正交码效果比较好。这种情况适用于DMRS端口数比较多,或者多用户复用时用户数比较多的情况。而如果用户数比较少,或者端口数比较少,DMRS的密度在频域上就没有比较那么密了,基站就可以配置给用户DMRS pattern 2或者4。如图10c。此时连续的两个子载波被用作正交。The length of the orthogonal code can be considered separately in the time domain, or the frequency domain can be considered separately. As shown in FIG. 10a, if the base station is configured with pattern 1 or 3 of the user, the length of the orthogonal code in the frequency domain can be considered to be 4, that is, every 4 consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain are orthogonal. As shown in FIG. 10b, four ports or users can be distinguished in the frequency domain by orthogonal codes of length 4, and the orthogonal codes of the four ports on consecutive four REs are [1 1 1 1], respectively. [1 -1 1 -1], [1 -1 -1 1], [1 1 -1 -1]. Since the four REs are continuous in the frequency domain, the channels are relatively similar, and the orthogonal code having a length of 4 is better. This situation applies to the case where the number of DMRS ports is relatively large, or the number of users is relatively large when multi-user multiplexing. If the number of users is relatively small, or the number of ports is relatively small, the density of the DMRS is not so dense in the frequency domain, and the base station can be configured to the user DMRS pattern 2 or 4. Figure 10c. At this time, two consecutive subcarriers are used as orthogonal.
换句话说,DMRS发送的正交码长度是2还是4可以不用信令显式的通或者用少量的信令通知,因为基站可以利用指示DMRS pattern的信令来隐含的通知用户一些关于正交码长度的信息。当然,一旦正交码的长度确定了,比如是2,那么正交码的序列是[1 1]还是[1 -1]还是得用信令通知。In other words, whether the orthogonal code length of the DMRS transmission is 2 or 4 can be explicitly signaled without signaling or with a small amount of signaling, because the base station can implicitly inform the user by using signaling indicating the DMRS pattern. Information about the length of the code. Of course, once the length of the orthogonal code is determined, for example, 2, then whether the sequence of the orthogonal code is [1 1] or [1 -1] still needs to be signaled.
当然,正交码的长度可以是联合时域和频域来考虑的。对于不同的DMRS pattern,那么联合的正交码长度不一样。如图10a所示,如果基站配置给用户DMRS pattern 4,根据上面所述,由于时域可以做长度为2的正交码,而频域也可以做长度为2的正交码,所以如果综合考虑时频域,那么正交码的长度就是4。在如图10d所示的4个RE中(时域2个,频域2个)可以利用长度为4的正交码来区分最多4个DMRS端口或者用户。Of course, the length of the orthogonal code can be considered in conjunction with the time domain and the frequency domain. For different DMRS patterns, the joint orthogonal code length is different. As shown in FIG. 10a, if the base station is configured to the user DMRS pattern 4, according to the above, since the time domain can be an orthogonal code of length 2, and the frequency domain can also be an orthogonal code of length 2, if integrated Considering the time-frequency domain, the length of the orthogonal code is 4. In the 4 REs as shown in FIG. 10d (2 in the time domain and 2 in the frequency domain), an orthogonal code of length 4 can be used to distinguish up to 4 DMRS ports or users.
然而,由于NR中一次调度资源可能包含1个或者多个时隙,一次调度的单元中所包含的DMRS列数跟调度单元中包含的时隙个数有关,也跟一 个时隙中包含的DMRS个数有关系。所以时域上能用的正交码的长度最大不能超过一个调度单元中所包含的DMRS列数。由于用户的速度不一样,速度快的用户在时域上信道变化快,所以利用时域正交码时包含的DMRS列数不能过多,即使用户被分配的调度单元很长。所以,基站可以半静态的配置给用户一个最大的正交码长度,如果用户分配的调度单元中包含的DMRS时域符号数小于最大正交码的长度,那么实际发送的DMRS使用的时域正交码长度就是调度单元中包含的DMRS符号数。而如果用户分配的调度单元中包含的DMRS时域符号数大于最大正交码的长度,那么用户就按照基站设置的最大正交码长度来发送DMRS或者接收DMRS。However, since the primary scheduling resource in the NR may include one or more time slots, the number of DMRS columns included in the primary scheduling unit is related to the number of time slots included in the scheduling unit, and is also related to The number of DMRSs included in each slot is related. Therefore, the length of the orthogonal code that can be used in the time domain cannot exceed the number of DMRS columns included in one scheduling unit. Since the speed of the user is different, the fast user has a fast channel change in the time domain, so the number of DMRS columns included in the time domain orthogonal code cannot be excessive, even if the scheduling unit allocated by the user is long. Therefore, the base station can give the user a maximum orthogonal code length in a semi-static configuration. If the number of DMRS time domain symbols included in the scheduling unit allocated by the user is less than the length of the largest orthogonal code, the time domain of the actually transmitted DMRS is positive. The cross code length is the number of DMRS symbols included in the scheduling unit. If the number of DMRS time domain symbols included in the scheduling unit allocated by the user is greater than the length of the largest orthogonal code, the user transmits the DMRS or receives the DMRS according to the maximum orthogonal code length set by the base station.
如上所述,由于基站一次可能调度多个时隙,而如何用较少的信令来达到最大的灵活性也是本公开研究的一个点。如果用1bit固定在DCI中指示是一次调度时1个时隙还是2个时隙,或者固定的2bits来指示1,2,3,4个时隙,或1,2,4,8个时隙。灵活性不够。因为对于一些数据量大的用户可能不需要配置1个时隙或者2个时隙,而6个时隙是需要的,或者一次调度中需要调度更多时隙。所以一种新的方法如下。As described above, since the base station may schedule multiple time slots at a time, how to achieve maximum flexibility with less signaling is also a point of the present disclosure. If 1 bit is fixed in the DCI, it indicates whether 1 time slot or 2 time slots in one scheduling, or fixed 2 bits to indicate 1, 2, 3, 4 time slots, or 1, 2, 4, 8 time slots. . Not enough flexibility. Because for some users with large data volume, it may not need to configure 1 time slot or 2 time slots, and 6 time slots are needed, or more time slots need to be scheduled in one scheduling. So a new method is as follows.
基站通过高层信令给不同的用户可以配置不同的最小调度单元,最小调度单元可以包含比如1,2,4,8个时隙。然后用较少的bits信令在DCI中动态的通知用户一次调度中调度了几个最小调度单元,比如用2bits来动态指示1,2,4,8或者1,2,3,4个最小调度单元。例如,假设基站分配UE0最小调度单元是1slot,而U1的最小调度单元是2slots,那么对于UE0,2bits(指示1,2,3,4个最小调度单元)表示1,2,3,4个slots,而对于U1,2bits表示2,4,6,8个slots调度。The base station can configure different minimum scheduling units for different users through high layer signaling, and the minimum scheduling unit can include, for example, 1, 2, 4, and 8 time slots. Then, with less bits signaling, the user is dynamically notified in the DCI that several minimum scheduling units are scheduled in one scheduling, for example, 2 bits are used to dynamically indicate 1, 2, 4, 8 or 1, 2, 3, 4 minimum scheduling. unit. For example, suppose the base station allocates the UE0 minimum scheduling unit to be 1slot, and the minimum scheduling unit of U1 is 2slots, then for UE0, 2bits (indicating 1, 2, 3, 4 minimum scheduling units) means 1, 2, 3, 4 slots. For U1, 2bits represents 2, 4, 6, and 8 slots scheduling.
不同的用户配置的最大正交码长度可以不同,也可以相同。例如预定义的配置所有用户的时域正交序列长度就是一个最小调度单元中的DMRS符号个数。即限定在时域正交码只能在一个最小调度单元中用。 The maximum orthogonal code lengths of different user configurations may be different or the same. For example, the predefined time domain orthogonal sequence length of all users is the number of DMRS symbols in a minimum scheduling unit. That is to say, the time domain orthogonal code can only be used in one minimum scheduling unit.
当然也可也将正交码限定在一个时隙中或者几个时隙中。不同的用户正交码长度不同。也就是说,基站可通过信令配置给用户时域正交码能在几个时隙中做。比如基站通过高层信令指示用户0正交码能在2个时隙中用,而通过DCI指示该用户的DMRS pattern中包含2列DMRS,且分配给该用户多余2个时隙的调度资源,那么时域上正交码的长度就是4,而如果分配给该用户1个时隙的调度资源,那么时域的正交码长度就是2。也就是说,基站可以通过信令限定正交码最大所能应用的时域范围,然后通过实际的DMRS图样和调度信息来判断正交码实际发送的长度。It is of course also possible to limit the orthogonal code in one time slot or in several time slots. Different user orthogonal code lengths are different. That is to say, the base station can be configured by signaling to the user that the time domain orthogonal code can be performed in several time slots. For example, the base station indicates that the user 0 orthogonal code can be used in two time slots through the high layer signaling, and the DCI indicates that the user's DMRS pattern includes two columns of DMRSs, and the scheduling resources allocated to the user for more than two time slots are Then the length of the orthogonal code in the time domain is 4, and if the scheduling resource allocated to the user 1 slot, the orthogonal code length of the time domain is 2. That is to say, the base station can limit the time domain range to which the orthogonal code can be applied by signaling, and then determine the length of the actual transmission of the orthogonal code by using the actual DMRS pattern and scheduling information.
如果一次调度单元包含N个slots,而一个slots里包含M个DMRS符号,那么正交码比如OCC的长度最多可以达到N*M。一方面,由于OCC长度依赖于用户的移动速度,所以OCC长度不宜过长,否则影响信道估计准确度。另一方面,适当的OCC的引入可以增强信道估计精度,且可以复用不同序列(即使两个DMRS的ZC序列长度不一样或者跟序列不一样),所以,正交码的引入也是十分必要的。由于是否做OCC依赖于DMRS pattern以及调度单元长度,所以根据一个slot中包含的DMRS符号个数,调度单元长度,RRC配置的最大OCC长度或者RRC配置的OCC能用的时隙个数,这三个参数中的至少一个参数来隐式的指示实际OCC长度比较好。综合信道估计特性,标准复杂度,控制信令开销来分析,最大OCC长度为2或者4比较合适。或者限定正交码最大能用的时隙范围是1个、2个、4个或者8个时隙。不同用户范围可以不一样。If a scheduling unit contains N slots and a slot contains M DMRS symbols, the length of the orthogonal code such as OCC can be up to N*M. On the one hand, since the OCC length depends on the user's moving speed, the OCC length should not be too long, otherwise the channel estimation accuracy is affected. On the other hand, the introduction of proper OCC can enhance the channel estimation accuracy, and can reuse different sequences (even if the lengths of ZC sequences of two DMRSs are different or different from the sequence), so the introduction of orthogonal codes is also very necessary. . Whether the OCC depends on the DMRS pattern and the scheduling unit length, according to the number of DMRS symbols included in one slot, the scheduling unit length, the maximum OCC length of the RRC configuration, or the number of slots used by the OC configured OCC, these three At least one of the parameters implicitly indicates that the actual OCC length is better. The integrated channel estimation characteristics, standard complexity, and control signaling overhead are analyzed, and the maximum OCC length is 2 or 4. Or the maximum available time slot of the orthogonal code is 1, 2, 4 or 8 time slots. Different user ranges can be different.
可以依赖于最小调度单元中的DMRS符号个数。在一个最小调度单元内做OCC。如果一个最小调度单元是2个slot,那么OCC长度就等于这两个slots里的DMRS符号个数。It may depend on the number of DMRS symbols in the minimum scheduling unit. Do OCC in a minimum scheduling unit. If a minimum scheduling unit is 2 slots, then the OCC length is equal to the number of DMRS symbols in the two slots.
可以半静态的配置最大的OCC长度,是UE specific。比如基站给用户配置最大正交码长度=2,而如果用户只分配了一个slot且只有一个DMRS  symbol,就不需要做OCC了,但是如果用户分配的资源包含2个以上DMRS symbol,那么就需要做长度为2的OCC。The maximum OCC length can be configured semi-statically, which is UE specific. For example, the base station configures the user with the maximum orthogonal code length = 2, and if the user only allocates one slot and only one DMRS Symbol, you do not need to do OCC, but if the user allocated resources contain more than 2 DMRS symbols, then you need to do OCC with length 2.
例如用3bits来通知CS,OCC,Comb的值。For example, 3 bits are used to inform CS, OCC, and Comb values.
如果LTE上行DMRS(ZC序列)的循环移位,OCC映射表,如果实际OCC长度等于2,如下表3所示:If the LTE uplink DMRS (ZC sequence) is cyclically shifted, the OCC mapping table, if the actual OCC length is equal to 2, is shown in Table 3 below:
Figure PCTCN2017078110-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2017078110-appb-000005
表3table 3
如果实际OCC长度等于1,则上表3中忽略OCC值的指示,通过CS也可以复用不同的DMRS端口。If the actual OCC length is equal to 1, the indication of the OCC value is ignored in Table 3 above, and different DMRS ports can also be multiplexed through the CS.
实施例5Example 5
用于解调参考信号发送的带宽可以划分成若干个子带。每个子带上是一个完整的序列。The bandwidth used for demodulation reference signal transmission can be divided into several sub-bands. Each subband is a complete sequence.
所述的第一通信节点用于给第二通信节点指示解调参考信号在一个发送单元中的一个子带上所用的根序列的信令,还可以用来指示解调参考信号在相同发送单元上的不同子带、和/或不同发送单元相同子带、和/或不同发送单元不同子带上所用的根序列。The first communication node is configured to indicate, to the second communication node, signaling of a root sequence used by the demodulation reference signal on a subband of a transmitting unit, and may also be used to indicate that the demodulation reference signal is in the same sending unit Different subbands on, and/or different subunits of different transmission units, and/or root sequences used on different subbands of different transmission units.
其中,不同子带上的根序列可以不同。Among them, the root sequences on different sub-bands can be different.
其中,不同发送单元,相同子带上的根序列可以不同。Among them, different sending units, the root sequence on the same sub-band can be different.
一般的,这种情况下每个子带(block)都用的是ZC序列。这样基站 可限定每个用户分配的最小频域资源就是1个子带。所以,用户可以根据分配的资源子带位置得到相应的DMRS序列。如图11,对于一个小区,每个block上的root序列号可以不一样,并随着slot的变化而变化。一个发送单元可以指一个时隙,一个子帧,或者多个时隙,多个子帧。指示一个子带上,一个发送单元上指示所用的根序列的信令可以用来指示其他子带或者其他时隙上的所有子带的根序列。例如,所有子带在一个时隙上的根序列都是由小区ID和时隙号来得到的。一个子带上的根序列是时隙号,和/或子帧号,子带号,小区ID中的一个或者多个的函数。所以,指示一个子带上的根序列的信令就是时隙号,和/或子帧号,子带号,小区ID。其中,对于不同子带,时隙号,和/或子帧号,小区ID可以是共享的。而对于时隙号,子带号,小区ID是可以共享的。不同子带上的根序列可以随着时间变化,这样可以达到序列干扰随机化。对于不同小区,在同一时刻,子带上的根序列可以不一样。In general, in this case, each sub-block uses a ZC sequence. Such base station The minimum frequency domain resource that can be defined for each user is 1 subband. Therefore, the user can obtain the corresponding DMRS sequence according to the allocated resource subband position. As shown in Figure 11, for a cell, the root serial number on each block can be different and will change as the slot changes. A transmitting unit may refer to one time slot, one subframe, or multiple time slots, and multiple subframes. Signaling on a subband indicating that the root sequence used on a transmitting unit can be used to indicate the root sequence of all subbands or all subbands on other time slots. For example, the root sequence of all subbands on a time slot is obtained by the cell ID and the slot number. The root sequence on a subband is a function of one or more of a slot number, and/or a subframe number, a subband number, and a cell ID. Therefore, the signaling indicating the root sequence on a subband is the slot number, and/or the subframe number, the subband number, and the cell ID. Wherein, for different subbands, slot numbers, and/or subframe numbers, the cell ID may be shared. For the slot number, subband number, the cell ID can be shared. The root sequence on different sub-bands can change over time, so that sequence interference randomization can be achieved. For different cells, the root sequence on the subbands can be different at the same time.
所有小区整个带宽上可以配置一个baseline的顺序,比如对于block#0,1…N-1的根序列分别是root#0,1,2,…N-1。这个顺序作为baseline。一个时隙或者子帧上的某一个子带上的Root(ns,cell_ID,block_ID)=mod(ns+cell_ID+baseline order of block_ID,N)。此处root#n对应的u值不一定就是0。比如总共25个root值,root#n代表第#n个root值。A baseline order can be configured for the entire bandwidth of all cells. For example, the root sequences of block # 0, 1...N-1 are root# 0, 1, 2, ..., N-1, respectively. This order is used as the baseline. Root (ns, cell_ID, block_ID) = mod (ns + cell_ID + baseline order of block_ID, N) on a certain sub-band in a time slot or subframe. Here, the u value corresponding to root#n is not necessarily 0. For example, a total of 25 root values, root#n represents the #n root value.
可选择的,RRC信令可配置spec_ID代替cell_ID。这样对于不同小区的一些用户就可以配置相同的spec_ID。如果根序列相同,那么可以依靠不同的循环移位来达到正交。Alternatively, the RRC signaling may configure the spec_ID instead of the cell_ID. This allows some users of different cells to configure the same spec_ID. If the root sequences are the same, then different cyclic shifts can be relied upon to achieve quadrature.
更灵活的,可以通过RRC配置两个或者多个spec_ID(包含cell_ID),基站调度时或者触发RS时用DCI动态选择一个。比如相邻两个小区的两个边缘用户,spec_ID中包含相同的spec_ID值,这样如果时频资源重叠的 时候,DCI触发相同的spec_ID,同时配置不同的CS值即可。More flexible, two or more spec_IDs (including cell_ID) can be configured through RRC, and one is dynamically selected by the DCI when the base station schedules or triggers the RS. For example, two edge users of two adjacent cells have the same spec_ID value in the spec_ID, so that if the time-frequency resources overlap At the same time, the DCI triggers the same spec_ID and configures different CS values.
所述的第一通信节点用于给第二通信节点指示解调参考信号在一个发送单元中的一个子带上所用的循环移位序列的信令,还可以用来指示解调参考信号在相同发送单元上的不同子带、和/或不同发送单元相同子带、和/或不同发送单元不同子带上所用的循环移位序列。The first communication node is configured to indicate to the second communication node, the signaling of the cyclic shift sequence used by the demodulation reference signal on a subband of a transmitting unit, and may also be used to indicate that the demodulation reference signal is the same Different sub-bands on the transmitting unit, and/or different sub-bands of different transmitting units, and/or cyclic shift sequences used on different sub-bands of different transmitting units.
其中,不同子带上的循环移位序列的顺序可以不同。Wherein, the order of the cyclic shift sequences on different sub-bands may be different.
其中,不同发送单元,相同子带上循环移位序列的顺序可以不同。Wherein, the order of the cyclic shift sequences on the same subband may be different for different transmitting units.
对于不同子带上的循环移位序列的顺序不同的情况,如图12对于一个小区,每个block上的CS Field指示的顺序可以不一样。并随着时间的变化而变化。如图在slot0,对于子带0,CS indicator的指示顺序是0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7。如果基站通过DCI信令告诉用户CSI Field的值是indicator#1(001),如下表4-1,那么
Figure PCTCN2017078110-appb-000006
的值对应的循环移位索引就是1,5,3,7。
For the case where the order of the cyclic shift sequences on different subbands is different, as shown in FIG. 12 for a cell, the order of CS Field indications on each block may be different. And it changes with time. As shown in slot 0, for subband 0, the order of indication of the CS indicator is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7. If the base station informs the user through the DCI signaling that the value of the CSI Field is indicator#1(001), as shown in Table 4-1 below, then
Figure PCTCN2017078110-appb-000006
The value of the cyclic shift index corresponding to the value is 1, 5, 3, 7.
Figure PCTCN2017078110-appb-000007
Figure PCTCN2017078110-appb-000007
表4-1Table 4-1
如图slot0,对于子带1,CS indicator的指示顺序是1,2,3,4,5,6,7,0。如果基站通过DCI信令告诉用户CSI Field的值是indicator#1(001),如下表4-2或者4-3,那么
Figure PCTCN2017078110-appb-000008
的值对应的循环移位索引就是,0,4,2,6或者2,6,4,0.
As shown in slot 0, for subband 1, the indication order of the CS indicator is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 0. If the base station informs the user through the DCI signaling that the value of the CSI Field is indicator#1(001), as shown in Table 4-2 or 4-3, then
Figure PCTCN2017078110-appb-000008
The cyclic shift index corresponding to the value is 0, 4, 2, 6 or 2, 6, 4, 0.
Figure PCTCN2017078110-appb-000009
Figure PCTCN2017078110-appb-000009
Figure PCTCN2017078110-appb-000010
Figure PCTCN2017078110-appb-000010
表4-2Table 4-2
Figure PCTCN2017078110-appb-000011
Figure PCTCN2017078110-appb-000011
表4-3Table 4-3
也就是说,由于不同子带循环移位序列的顺序不同,在DCI中通知的一个CSI field指示值对于不同子带意义是不一样的,所代表的时间循环移位的值不同。对于不同子帧或者时隙也是一样。权利要求中描述的,所述的第一通信节点用于给第二通信节点指示解调参考信号在一个发送单元中的一个子带上所用的循环移位序列的信令,还可以用来指示解调参考信号在相同发送单元上的不同子带、和/或不同发送单元相同子带、和/或不同发送单元不同子带上所用的循环移位序列,指的就是多个子带上可以共享CSIfield指示值。在DCI中只需通知一个CSI field的指示值,用户根据不同的子带即可以推算出真实的CS值。That is to say, since the order of the different sub-band cyclic shift sequences is different, one CSI field indication value notified in the DCI is different for different sub-band meanings, and the values of the time cyclic shifts represented are different. The same is true for different subframes or time slots. The first communication node is configured to indicate to the second communication node, the second communication node, the signaling of the cyclic shift sequence used by the demodulation reference signal on a subband of a transmitting unit, and may also be used to indicate The cyclic shift sequence used by the demodulation reference signal on different subbands on the same transmitting unit, and/or in the same subband of different transmitting units, and/or on different subbands of different transmitting units, means that multiple subbands can be shared CSIfield indicates the value. In the DCI, only the indication value of a CSI field needs to be notified, and the user can derive the true CS value according to different sub-bands.
对于一个slot,每个block上循环移位序列的顺序可以根据slot number and cell ID来计算,不需要信令配置。所有小区整个带宽上可以配置一个baseline order,比如CS order#0,1,2,…N-1作为baseline order for  block#0,1…N-1。循环移位序列的顺序可以是CS_order(ns,cell_ID,block_ID)=mod(ns+cell_ID+baseline order of block_ID,N)。对于同一个子帧,相邻的带宽上的循环移位的顺序偏移了一位,如图12所示。For a slot, the order of cyclic shift sequences on each block can be calculated according to the slot number and cell ID, and no signaling configuration is required. A baseline order can be configured for the entire bandwidth of all cells, such as CS order# 0,1,2,...N-1 as the baseline order for Block# 0,1...N-1. The order of the cyclic shift sequence may be CS_order (ns, cell_ID, block_ID) = mod (ns + cell_ID + baseline order of block_ID, N). For the same sub-frame, the order of cyclic shifts on adjacent bandwidths is offset by one bit, as shown in FIG.
当然,跟上述根序列的方法一样,可以一个spec_ID代替cell ID。这个spec_ID可以是和上述根序列中提到的spec_ID一样。即基站只需要通知一个spec_ID即可。Of course, as with the root sequence above, a spec_ID can be substituted for the cell ID. This spec_ID can be the same as the spec_ID mentioned in the above root sequence. That is, the base station only needs to notify a spec_ID.
本公开实施例所述的信令就是指这些spec_ID或者小区ID,时隙号,子帧号等。在一个子帧或时隙,所有子带可以根据同一个spec_ID来推算出每个子带上的循环移位序列顺序。The signaling described in the embodiment of the present disclosure refers to these spec_ID or cell ID, slot number, subframe number, and the like. In one subframe or time slot, all subbands can derive the cyclic shift sequence order on each subband based on the same spec_ID.
所述的第一通信节点用于给第二通信节点指示解调参考信号在一个发送单元The first communication node is configured to indicate to the second communication node that the demodulation reference signal is in a sending unit
中的一个子带上所用的图样序号的信令,还可以用来指示解调参考信号在相同发送单元上的不同子带和/或不同发送单元相同子带和/或不同发送单元不同子带上所用的图样序号。Signaling of the pattern number used on one of the subbands may also be used to indicate different subbands of the demodulation reference signal on the same transmitting unit and/or different subbands of different transmitting units and/or different subbands of different transmitting units The number of the pattern used on it.
其中,不同子带上的图样序号可以不同。Among them, the pattern numbers on different sub-bands can be different.
其中,不同发送单元,相同子带上的图样序号可以不同。Among them, different transmission units, the pattern numbers on the same sub-band can be different.
即不同的block之间DMRS图样可以不一样。如图13所示。基站可配置多个DMRS图样,每个子带上的图样可以不同,也可以随着时间变化而变化。每个子带上的图样可以跟spec_ID或者小区ID,时隙号或者子帧号有关。That is, the DMRS pattern between different blocks can be different. As shown in Figure 13. The base station can be configured with multiple DMRS patterns, and the patterns on each sub-band can be different or can change with time. The pattern on each subband can be related to the spec_ID or cell ID, slot number or subframe number.
所述的第一通信节点用所述信令指示第二通信节点用于解调参考信号发送的带宽根据子带长度的不同支持多种划分方法。The first communication node uses the signaling to indicate that the bandwidth used by the second communication node to demodulate the reference signal transmission supports multiple partitioning methods according to different sub-band lengths.
多段级联的方案需要将整个带宽分配成多个block。A multi-segment cascading scheme requires the entire bandwidth to be allocated into multiple blocks.
此方案对于小包业务有调度限制,因为最小调度单元限制成了一个block。本公开中系统可以支持多种子带划分。比如支持两种划分:(1)one  block=4PRBs;(2)one block=1PRBs。不同用户可以RRC配置或者DCI或者根据隐含的方式来决定block长度,比如调度分配方式。如果用户的调度分配方式决定用户分配的资源是离散的,或者是PRB个数比较小,那么就默认是划分方式2,否则就是划分方式1。This scheme has scheduling restrictions for the packet service because the minimum scheduling unit is limited to one block. The system of the present disclosure can support multiple sub-band partitioning. For example, support two divisions: (1) one Block=4PRBs; (2) one block=1PRBs. Different users can configure the block length by RRC configuration or DCI or according to an implicit method, such as scheduling allocation mode. If the scheduling mode of the user determines that the resources allocated by the user are discrete, or the number of PRBs is relatively small, then the default is division mode 2, otherwise it is division mode 1.
实施例6Example 6
所述的第一通信节点通过指示以下一个或者多个信令来指示解调参考信号所用的图样,密度和/或序列:指示调制编码方式的信令,指示传输方式的信令,重传指示信令,接收方式。其中,所述图样至少包括时域符号的个数或者是否与数据同时传输。The first communication node indicates a pattern used to demodulate the reference signal by indicating one or more of the following signaling, density and/or sequence: signaling indicating a modulation and coding mode, signaling indicating a transmission mode, and retransmission indication Signaling, receiving mode. The pattern includes at least the number of time domain symbols or whether it is transmitted simultaneously with the data.
一般的,高阶调制的数据发送对信道估计要求更高,所以可能需要解调参考信号的密度更大,而对于低阶调制的数据发送对信道估计要求低一些,所以解调参考信号的密度可以低一些。所以,对于用户配置的多个DMRS Pattern,可以将MCS的指示划分成多个集合,同时也将DMRS的Patterns分成多个集合,每种MCS集合对应一种DMRS pattern集合。比如用5bits信令来指示MCS的值从0到31,那么MCS 0-15对应一种DMRS pattern集合,而MCS16-31对应另外一种DMRS图样集合。如图13所示,可以将DMRS的多个Pattern分成2个集合,第一个和第二个为一个集合,第三个和第四个为一个集合,如果信令通知MCS的值低于一个门限值,DMRS的pattern就是图样1和2,否则就是图样3和4。In general, high-order modulation data transmission requires higher channel estimation, so it may be necessary to demodulate the reference signal to have a higher density, and for low-order modulation data transmission, the channel estimation requirement is lower, so the density of the demodulated reference signal is demodulated. Can be lower. Therefore, for a plurality of DMRS patterns configured by the user, the indication of the MCS may be divided into multiple sets, and the Patterns of the DMRS are also divided into multiple sets, and each MCS set corresponds to one DMRS pattern set. For example, if 5 bits signaling is used to indicate that the MCS value is from 0 to 31, MCS 0-15 corresponds to one DMRS pattern set, and MCS16-31 corresponds to another DMRS pattern set. As shown in FIG. 13, multiple patterns of the DMRS may be divided into two sets, the first and the second are a set, and the third and fourth are a set, if the value of the MCS is reported to be lower than one. The threshold value, the pattern of the DMRS is the patterns 1 and 2, otherwise the patterns 3 and 4.
如图21所示,如果用户从动态的DCI信息中获得的MCS值大于高层信令配置的门限值,那么可以认为DMRS的图样如右图所示,此时空白的资源单元(REs,Resource Elements)用来传输数据,即DMRS与数据FDM。而用户从动态的DCI信息中获得的MCS值小于高层信令配置的门限值,那么可以认为DMRS的图样如左图所示,DMRS的密度较高,且不和数据频分复用。此方法尤其适用于DMRS port数较大的情况,比如DMRS的端口 数大于等于4,如图21所示。As shown in FIG. 21, if the MCS value obtained by the user from the dynamic DCI information is greater than the threshold value of the high-level signaling configuration, the DMRS pattern can be considered as shown in the right figure, and the blank resource unit (REs, Resource) at this time. Elements) are used to transfer data, ie DMRS and data FDM. If the MCS value obtained by the user from the dynamic DCI information is smaller than the threshold of the high-level signaling configuration, the DMRS pattern can be considered as shown in the left figure, and the density of the DMRS is high, and is not frequency-multiplexed with the data. This method is especially suitable for the case where the number of DMRS ports is large, such as the port of DMRS. The number is greater than or equal to 4, as shown in FIG.
类似的,如果在MCS较低时,DMRS的需要占用两个符号来进行较好的信道估计,而在MCS较高时,只需要一个时域符号来传输DMRS即可,剩余的资源可以用来传输数据。如图22所示。基站可利用MCS的动态信令和高层配置的门限值来隐含的通知DMRS占用了一个OFDM符号还是2个OFDM符号。Similarly, if the MCS is low, the DMRS needs to occupy two symbols for better channel estimation, and when the MCS is higher, only one time domain symbol is needed to transmit the DMRS, and the remaining resources can be used. transfer data. As shown in Figure 22. The base station can use the dynamic signaling of the MCS and the threshold of the high-level configuration to implicitly notify the DMRS whether to occupy one OFDM symbol or two OFDM symbols.
总之,基站通知用户动态的MCS信息和高层配置的门限值也可以用来通知DMRS时域符号数或者用来通知DMRS是否和数据频分复用。In summary, the base station notifies the user of the dynamic MCS information and the high-level configuration threshold value can also be used to notify the DMRS time domain symbol number or to inform the DMRS whether to frequency-multiplex the data with the data.
由于不同传输层(对应一个DMRS端口)或者不同码字(类似于LTE TB)可以对应不同的MCS,如果不同的DMRS端口对应不同的MCS值,此时不同DMRS端口对应的DMRS图样可以不同。比如如果端口1,2对应的MCS值低于高层配置的MCS门限值,那么端口1,2就需要较高的密度,即不和数据复用或者需要2个时域符号传输DMRS,而端口3,4对应的MCS值高于高层配置的门限值,此时端口3,4就需要较低的密度,即可以和数据频分复用或者只需要1个时域符号传输DMRS。换句话说,不同的调制方式和/或编码方式对应数据解调参考信号不同端口的密度。如图23所示。The different DMRS ports may correspond to different MCSs, and different DMRS ports may correspond to different MCS values. For example, if the MCS value corresponding to port 1, 2 is lower than the MCS threshold of the upper layer configuration, port 1, 2 needs higher density, that is, it does not reuse data or requires 2 time domain symbols to transmit DMRS, and the port The MCS value corresponding to 3, 4 is higher than the threshold of the high-level configuration. At this time, ports 3 and 4 need lower density, that is, frequency division multiplexing with data or only one time domain symbol transmission DMRS. In other words, different modulation schemes and/or coding schemes correspond to the density of different ports of the data demodulation reference signal. As shown in Figure 23.
值得注意的是,本公开中MCS的门限值可以是高层配置的,也可以是预定义的值,不需要信令通知。另外,动态MCS和MCS的门限值可以像LTE一样联合通知调制编码方式,也可以分开通知调制方式和编码方式,此时MCS的门限值可以只针对调制方式设置,比如设置为16QAM,而不管编码效率。当然MCS的门限值也可以只针对code rate设置而不管调制方式。It should be noted that the threshold of the MCS in the present disclosure may be configured at a high level or may be a predefined value without signaling. In addition, the thresholds of the dynamic MCS and the MCS can be jointly notified to the modulation and coding mode as in the LTE, and the modulation mode and the coding mode can be separately notified. At this time, the threshold of the MCS can be set only for the modulation mode, for example, 16QAM, and Regardless of coding efficiency. Of course, the threshold of the MCS can also be set only for the code rate regardless of the modulation mode.
由于DMRS占用的符号个数以及是否和数据频域复用跟DMR图样有关,也可以说是基站用联合的信令指示调制方式和/或编码方式配置信息以及数据解调参考信号的图样。所述调制方式和/或编码方式配置信息包括一 下至少之一:动态的数据调制方式和/或编码方式,调制方式和/或编码方式门限。而所述的图样包括解调参考信号的时域符号个数和/或解调参考信号是否与数据同时传输。Since the number of symbols occupied by the DMRS and whether the data frequency domain multiplexing is related to the DMR pattern, it can also be said that the base station uses the joint signaling to indicate the modulation mode and/or the coding mode configuration information and the data demodulation reference signal pattern. The modulation mode and/or coding mode configuration information includes a At least one of: a dynamic data modulation mode and/or coding mode, a modulation mode and/or a coding mode threshold. The pattern includes the number of time domain symbols of the demodulation reference signal and/or whether the demodulation reference signal is transmitted simultaneously with the data.
对于传输方式的信令,基站一般用来告诉用户是传输分集,闭环空间复用,或者开环空间复用等,所以可以借助此信令来推断DMRS的图样,密度等。同样可以将DMRS的图样分成多个集合,不同的解调参考信号对应不同的DMRS图样集合。For the signaling of the transmission mode, the base station is generally used to tell the user whether it is transmission diversity, closed-loop spatial multiplexing, or open-loop spatial multiplexing, etc., so the signaling, the density, and the like of the DMRS can be inferred by using the signaling. Similarly, the pattern of the DMRS can be divided into multiple sets, and different demodulation reference signals correspond to different sets of DMRS patterns.
另外,如果调度的数据是重传数据,那么DMRS的密度可以不一样。同样可以将DMRS的图样分成多个集合,重传还是首传对应的是不同的DMRS图样集合。不同重传次数可以对应不同的DMRS图样集合。例如,第一次重传和第二次重传的DMRS图样不同。所以,根据是否重传,或者重传的次数UE就可以得到DMRS图样的一些信息。In addition, if the scheduled data is retransmitted data, the density of the DMRS can be different. It is also possible to divide the pattern of the DMRS into multiple sets, and the retransmission or the first transmission corresponds to a different set of DMRS patterns. Different retransmission times may correspond to different DMRS pattern sets. For example, the DMRS pattern of the first retransmission and the second retransmission is different. Therefore, the UE can obtain some information of the DMRS pattern according to whether it is retransmitted or the number of retransmissions.
值得注意的是,一个DMRS集合中可以只包含一个DMRS图样。It is worth noting that a DMRS set can contain only one DMRS pattern.
对于接收方式的指示信令,用户可以按照不同的接收方式指示信令来确定DMRS的图样集合或者图样或者DMRS序列。例如,如果基站指示用户不同接收时需要做波束扫描,那么DMRS的图样可以如图14所述,即多列DMRS的模拟波束是一样的,用户可以用不同的接收波束来检测多列DMRS,然后挑选出一列最好的DMRS用于解调。此时不同列的DMRS可能只是简单的重复,没有序列变化。For the indication signaling of the receiving mode, the user may determine the DMRS pattern set or the pattern or the DMRS sequence according to different receiving mode indication signaling. For example, if the base station indicates that the user needs to perform beam scanning when receiving differently, the pattern of the DMRS may be as shown in FIG. 14, that is, the analog beams of the multi-row DMRS are the same, and the user may use different receiving beams to detect the multi-row DMRS, and then Pick a list of the best DMRS for demodulation. At this point, the DMRS of different columns may be simply repeated, with no sequence changes.
而如果基站指示用户接收时不用做接收波束扫描,那么DMRS的图样可以不用多列DMRS对应多个模拟波束。此时如果有多列DMRS,对应的序列就可以不一样。If the base station indicates that the user does not need to perform receive beam scanning, the DMRS pattern may not use multiple columns of DMRSs to correspond to multiple analog beams. If there are multiple columns of DMRS at this time, the corresponding sequence can be different.
实施例7Example 7
所述的第一通信节点通过信令指示第二通信节点不同的解调参考信号 组对应的解调参考信号的密度和/或正交码长度可以不同。The first communication node indicates different demodulation reference signals of the second communication node by signaling The density and/or orthogonal code length of the corresponding demodulation reference signal may be different.
其中,不同的解调参考信号组对应一下一个或者多个方式:不同的资源组,不同的解调参考信号端口,不同的传输码字,不同的传输层数。The different demodulation reference signal groups correspond to one or more modes: different resource groups, different demodulation reference signal ports, different transmission code words, and different transmission layers.
LTE中,一次调度最多可以传输两个码字,每个码字可以包含多个层。每个码字都有信令指示HARQ process,指示MCS等。每个层可能对应不同的DMRS端口。In LTE, one scheduling can transmit up to two codewords, and each codeword can contain multiple layers. Each codeword has a signaling indication HARQ process, indicating MCS, and the like. Each layer may correspond to a different DMRS port.
在5G中未来研究中,由于不同的DMRS端口可能来自于不同的基站或者小区,而对于不同小区或者基站下是否是多用户调度,调度多少个用户来做多用户MIMO都可能是独立的。所以不同的DMRS端口或者端口集合的密度如果可以不一样的话,就可以达到最大的灵活性。如图15所示,端口1和端口2的密度要高于端口3和端口4。如果一个用户被调度了2个码字,码字1对应层1和2,而端口1和2分别对应层1和2,相应的,如果码字2对应端口3和4,那么码字1对应的DMRS的密度就高于码字2对应的DMRS密度。也就是说,本公开中不同的DMRS端口,或者码字,或者层对应的DMRS的密度可以不一样。当然也可以看成是不同的DMRS资源组对应的DMRS密度不一样,比如如图15所述,上面的方框对应的DMRS时频资源组的密度就高于底下方框中的DMRS时频资源组对应的DMRS密度。上面方框中的DMRS时频资源组由4个RE组成,而底下的只有2个RE组成。In future research in 5G, since different DMRS ports may come from different base stations or cells, and whether multiple users are scheduled under different cells or base stations, how many users are scheduled to perform multi-user MIMO may be independent. Therefore, if the density of different DMRS ports or port sets can be different, maximum flexibility can be achieved. As shown in Figure 15, port 1 and port 2 are denser than port 3 and port 4. If a user is scheduled for 2 codewords, codeword 1 corresponds to layers 1 and 2, and ports 1 and 2 correspond to layers 1 and 2, respectively, correspondingly, if codeword 2 corresponds to ports 3 and 4, then codeword 1 corresponds to The density of the DMRS is higher than the DMRS density corresponding to the code word 2. That is to say, the density of different DMRS ports, or codewords, or DMRSs corresponding to layers in the present disclosure may be different. Of course, it can be seen that the DMRS density corresponding to different DMRS resource groups is different. For example, as shown in FIG. 15, the density of the DMRS time-frequency resource group corresponding to the above box is higher than the DMRS time-frequency resource in the lower frame. The corresponding DMRS density of the group. The DMRS time-frequency resource group in the above box consists of 4 REs, while the bottom consists of only 2 REs.
因为不同端口可能来自不同小区,所以为了在不同小区与不同个数的用户复用,所以正交码的长度也可能不同。如图15所述,因为端口1和2对应的时域DMRS符号数是2,所以时域上的正交码长度可以为2,这样靠时域正交就可以复用2个端口或者2个用户。而对于端口3,4来说,由于时域只有一个DMRS符号,时域的正交码长度为1,所以只能靠频域正交或者在频域上利用正交码来区分端口3和4了。 Since different ports may come from different cells, the length of the orthogonal codes may also be different in order to multiplex with different numbers of users in different cells. As shown in FIG. 15, since the number of time domain DMRS symbols corresponding to ports 1 and 2 is 2, the orthogonal code length in the time domain can be 2, so that 2 ports or 2 can be multiplexed by time domain orthogonality. user. For ports 3 and 4, since there is only one DMRS symbol in the time domain and the orthogonal code length in the time domain is 1, the orthogonal codes can be used to distinguish between ports 3 and 4 by frequency domain orthogonality or frequency domain. It is.
所述第一通信节点通过高层信令配置给第二通信节点多种解调参考信号参数或者通过高层信令从预定义的多个解调参考信号图样中配置给第二通信节点其中一部分图样。并且,所述第一通信节点通过动态信令通知第二通信节点所用的解调参考信号的参数或者图样是高层信令中的哪一个。The first communication node is configured by the high-level signaling to the second communication node for multiple demodulation reference signal parameters or configured by a high-level signaling from a predefined plurality of demodulation reference signal patterns to a part of the second communication node. And, the first communication node notifies, by dynamic signaling, which parameter or pattern of the demodulation reference signal used by the second communication node is the higher layer signaling.
所述第一通信节点通过动态信令隐含地或者清晰地或者二者结合地通知第二通信节点所用的解调参考信号的参数或者图样是高层信令中的哪一个。隐含的通知就是基站利用其它用途的信令来指示DMRS图样信息,比如如前面技术点提到的MCS,A/N反馈时延等。而清晰的通知即基站需要明确的bit位来指示DMRS信息。或者二者结合。The first communication node notifies, by means of dynamic signaling, implicitly or clearly or a combination of both, which parameter or pattern of the demodulation reference signal used by the second communication node is the higher layer signaling. The implicit notification is that the base station uses other purposes of signaling to indicate DMRS pattern information, such as MCS, A/N feedback delay, etc. as mentioned in the prior art. The clear notification means that the base station needs a clear bit to indicate the DMRS information. Or a combination of the two.
一般的,为了适应不同的应用场景,解调参考信号可以有很多种图样,密度,序列,正交码长度等,对应不同的解调参考信号的参数。这样系统可以预定义一个大的DMRS图样或者参数集合,这个DMRS集合可以包含所有图样,序列,正交码长度等。由于不同的用户信道条件不一样,所以基站可通过高层信令半静态的从这个集合中挑选一个DMRS子集,这个子集中包含一些适合于该用户的DMRS图样,和/或密度,时频域位置,和/或序列,和/或正交码长度等。在实际调度中,基站需要动态的告诉用户在某一个调度单元时使用的DMRS参数或者图样是高层信令配置的子集中的哪一个。Generally, in order to adapt to different application scenarios, the demodulation reference signal can have a variety of patterns, density, sequence, orthogonal code length, etc., corresponding to different demodulation reference signal parameters. Such a system can predefine a large DMRS pattern or set of parameters, and this DMRS set can contain all patterns, sequences, orthogonal code lengths, and the like. Since different user channel conditions are different, the base station can semi-statically select a DMRS subset from the set through high-level signaling, and the subset includes some DMRS patterns suitable for the user, and/or density, time-frequency domain. Location, and/or sequence, and/or orthogonal code length, and the like. In actual scheduling, the base station needs to dynamically inform the user which DMRS parameter or pattern used in a certain scheduling unit is a subset of the higher layer signaling configuration.
例如,预定义的DMRS图样中包含8中图样,如图16所示。基站可利用高层信令从8中图样中挑选出4中,比如pattern 1,2,3,4.然后在调度中,基站可再利用动态信令通知用户具体是哪一个pattern,比如用DCI中的2bits来指示是高层信令配置的子集中的哪一个Pattern。当然,按照本公开中所包含的技术,基站可以用其他参数隐含的通知用户一些DMRS配置信息,比如将高层信令配置的DMRS图样子集分成两个小子集,比如pattern 1,2是小子集1,pattern3,4是小子集2。基站可通过MCS信令来隐含的指示 是小子集1还是小子集2。这样,基站就只需要额外的1bit在DCI中来指示到底是小子集中的哪一个DMRS pattern。For example, the predefined DMRS pattern contains 8 patterns, as shown in Figure 16. The base station can use the high layer signaling to select 4 out of the 8 patterns, such as pattern 1, 2, 3, 4. Then in the scheduling, the base station can reuse the dynamic signaling to inform the user which pattern, for example, in the DCI. 2bits to indicate which of the subsets of the higher layer signaling configuration is the Pattern. Of course, according to the technology included in the present disclosure, the base station may implicitly notify the user of some DMRS configuration information by using other parameters, such as dividing the DMRS pattern subset of the high layer signaling configuration into two small subsets, such as pattern 1, 2 is a kid. Set 1, pattern3, 4 is a small subset of 2. Implied indication by the base station through MCS signaling Is it a small subset 1 or a small subset 2. In this way, the base station only needs an extra 1 bit in the DCI to indicate which DMRS pattern is in the small subset.
实施例8Example 8
所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号的图样时,还用来指示时隙结构。其中解调参考信号的图样包括以下至少之一:The preset signaling is used to indicate the pattern of the demodulation reference signal, and is also used to indicate the slot structure. The pattern of the demodulation reference signal includes at least one of the following:
解调参考信号子集的时域位置,时域符号的个数,所能支持最大的正交端口数,解调参考信号包含的子集个数。The time domain position of the demodulation reference signal subset, the number of time domain symbols, the maximum number of orthogonal ports that can be supported, and the number of subsets included in the demodulation reference signal.
也可以说基站利用联合的信令指示时隙结构,数据解调参考信号的图样时。所述数据解It can also be said that the base station uses the joint signaling to indicate the slot structure and the data demodulates the pattern of the reference signal. The data solution
调参考信号的图样包括时域符号的个数和/或所能支持最大的解调参考信号端口数。或者所述数据解调参考信号的图样包括解调参考信号多个子集的时域间距,子集的个数,子集的时域位置。The pattern of the reference signal includes the number of time domain symbols and/or the number of demodulation reference signal ports that can support the maximum. Or the pattern of the data demodulation reference signal includes a time domain spacing of a plurality of subsets of the demodulation reference signal, a number of subsets, and a time domain position of the subset.
NR可能支持两种或者多种时隙结构,例如支持两种时隙结构,第一种是包含7个时域符号的时隙结构,第二种是包含14个时域符号的时隙结构。同时,NR要支持self-contained slot结构,即在同一个时隙(slot)内,基站通过动态控制信令(比如PDCCH)调度在本slot下行数据传输,同时用户在相同的slot内检测到PDSCH并上报接收正确与否,也就是说调度,数据传输,ACK/NACK反馈在同一个slot内完成。这对用户解调速度就要求很高。此时需要将DMRS放置在slot内PDSCH区域的靠前的部分。我们称这种靠前的DMRS位front loaded DMRS。对于self-contained这种slot结构,一般最后一个或者2个时域符号用来传输ACK/NACK,下行数据和ACK/NACK之间还需要最少一个符号的保护间隔。The NR may support two or more slot structures, for example, support two slot structures, the first is a slot structure containing seven time domain symbols, and the second is a slot structure containing 14 time domain symbols. At the same time, the NR needs to support the self-contained slot structure, that is, in the same slot, the base station schedules downlink data transmission in the slot through dynamic control signaling (such as PDCCH), and the user detects the PDSCH in the same slot. And report whether the reception is correct or not, that is, scheduling, data transmission, ACK/NACK feedback is completed in the same slot. This requires a high degree of user demodulation speed. At this point, the DMRS needs to be placed in the front part of the PDSCH area in the slot. We call this top DMRS bit loaded DMRS. For the self-contained slot structure, the last one or two time domain symbols are generally used to transmit ACK/NACK, and a guard interval of at least one symbol is required between the downlink data and the ACK/NACK.
如图24a所示,7个符号的时隙结构,假定符号#7用于用户反馈ACK/NACK,而符号#6用于保护间隔,即不传输任何数据,用于上下行切 换。而符号#1,#2用于基站发送PDCCH,此时只剩下符号3,4,5可以用来传输数据及DMRS。如果DMRS占用2个时域符号,那么数据可用的资源就很少。所以在时隙为7个符号时,限定front loaded DMRS为一个符号是很有必要的。此时基站可利用通知时隙结构的信令来隐含的通知DMRS的符号个数。也就是说,基站可利用联合的信息指示时隙结构和DMRS符号个数。这种指示方式尤其适用于DMRS是front loaded的情况。如果不需要front loaded DMRS,或者不需要ACK/NACK与PDSCH在同一个子帧发送时,可以不参考此联合指示信息。As shown in Fig. 24a, the 7-symbol slot structure assumes that symbol #7 is used for user feedback ACK/NACK, and symbol #6 is used for guard interval, that is, no data is transmitted for uplink and downlink cuts. change. The symbols #1, #2 are used by the base station to transmit the PDCCH. At this time, only the symbols 3, 4, and 5 can be used to transmit data and DMRS. If the DMRS occupies 2 time domain symbols, then there are very few resources available for the data. Therefore, when the time slot is 7 symbols, it is necessary to limit the front loaded DMRS to one symbol. At this time, the base station can implicitly notify the number of symbols of the DMRS by using signaling of the notification slot structure. That is, the base station can use the combined information to indicate the slot structure and the number of DMRS symbols. This indication is especially useful when the DMRS is front loaded. If the front loaded DMRS is not required, or when the ACK/NACK is not required to be transmitted in the same subframe as the PDSCH, the joint indication information may not be referred to.
如图24b,24c所示,如果时隙结构为14个符号,那么front loaded DMRS的符号个数就可以是1个或者2个。所以基站可以利用时隙结构的信息来指示DMRS用于快速解调时符号个数是1个还是2个。比如基站利用1bit DCI信息指示用户slot结构,0表示7个符号,1表示14个符号,此时如果DMRS是front loaded DMRS,即需要快速解调和反馈,那么DMRS只占用1个时域符号,而1也表示DMRS可以占用1个或者2个时域符号。As shown in Figures 24b and 24c, if the slot structure is 14 symbols, the number of symbols of the front loaded DMRS may be one or two. Therefore, the base station can use the information of the slot structure to indicate whether the number of symbols used by the DMRS for fast demodulation is one or two. For example, the base station uses the 1-bit DCI information to indicate the user slot structure, where 0 represents 7 symbols and 1 represents 14 symbols. If the DMRS is front loaded DMRS, that is, fast demodulation and feedback are required, the DMRS only occupies one time domain symbol. 1 also indicates that the DMRS can occupy 1 or 2 time domain symbols.
由于1个DMRS时域符号所能支持的最大DMRS端口数小于2个DMRS时域符号所能支持的最大DMRS端口数,所以也可以说,基站利用联合的信息指示参考信号图样所能支持最大的解调参考信号端口数。Since the maximum number of DMRS ports that can be supported by one DMRS time domain symbol is smaller than the maximum number of DMRS ports that can be supported by two DMRS time domain symbols, it can also be said that the base station uses the joint information to indicate that the reference signal pattern can support the maximum. Demodulate the number of reference signal ports.
为了获得更好的信道估计特性,DMRS可分为多个子集,比如2个。此DMRS的两个集合的时域间距也可以跟时隙机构通过联合的信息来通知。一般的,每个DMRS子集包含相同的DMRS图样。比如在只有2个DMRS子集的情况下,在只包含7个时域符号的时隙中,2个DMRS子集的时域间距为D_A,而在包含14个时域符号的时隙中,2个DMRS子集的时域间距为D_B,那么D_A小于D_B。因为7symbol的时隙较短,而14symbol的时隙较长,所以较短的时隙对应的DMRS子集的间距要小于较长时隙对应的DMRS子集间距。 In order to obtain better channel estimation characteristics, DMRS can be divided into multiple subsets, such as two. The time domain spacing of the two sets of DMRSs can also be communicated to the time slot mechanism through the combined information. In general, each DMRS subset contains the same DMRS pattern. For example, in the case of only two DMRS subsets, in a time slot containing only seven time domain symbols, the time domain spacing of two DMRS subsets is D_A, and in a time slot containing 14 time domain symbols, The time domain spacing of the two DMRS subsets is D_B, then D_A is less than D_B. Since the 7symbol time slot is shorter and the 14symbol time slot is longer, the shorter time slot corresponding DMRS subset spacing is smaller than the longer time slot corresponding DMRS subset spacing.
在DMRS的子集个数确定后,对不同的时隙结构,可以预定义的或者高层信令配置DMRS子集的位置,这样基站可以利用联合的信息来通知时隙结构和DMRS子集的位置。After the number of subsets of the DMRS is determined, the locations of the DMRS subsets may be configured for pre-defined or higher layer signaling for different slot structures, so that the base station can use the joint information to inform the slot structure and the location of the DMRS subset. .
如图25所示,如果DMRS子集的个数为2,基站可利用联合信令1bit,0表示7个symbol的时隙结构且两个DMRS的位置为符号3,5;而1表示14个symbol的时隙结构且两个DMRS子集的位置分别为3,10。同时可以看出7个symbol时隙中两个子集DMRS的位置间距为2,而14个symbol时隙中两个DMRS子集的位置间距为7,比较大。As shown in FIG. 25, if the number of DMRS subsets is 2, the base station can utilize joint signaling 1 bit, 0 represents a slot structure of 7 symbols, and the positions of two DMRSs are symbols 3, 5; and 1 represents 14 The slot structure of symbol and the positions of the two DMRS subsets are 3, 10 respectively. At the same time, it can be seen that the positional spacing of the two subsets of DMRS in the seven symbol slots is 2, and the positional spacing of the two DMRS subsets in the 14 symbol slots is 7, which is relatively large.
一个DMRS子集可以看做是一个或者2个连续的OFDM符号上传输的DMRS,或者可以是DMRS发送的一个周期。如图25左图所示,DMRS第一个子集映射在第3个符号,第二个子集映射在第5个符号,在第三个和第五个符号内,DMRS的所有端口都完全发送了。也就是说,多个DMRS的子集频域映射的资源位置相同,都映射了相同的端口,只是在时间上不同。可以看出符号5上的DMRS图样是符号3的一个重复,只是映射在了不同的时域符号上。值得注意的是,本文所述的方法可以应用在多个DMRS子集的情况。当然也不排除第一子集和第二子集的图样,端口个数或者密度不同的情况。另外,本文的公开不局限于2个子集的情况,可以应用到多个子集的情况。很容易可以看出,7个时域符号的时隙结构支持的DMRS子集要少于14个符号时隙结构支持的DMRS子集个数。在高多普勒频移的场景下,14个符号时隙结构往往需要在时域上更多的DMRS,也就是说需要更多的DMRS子集个数。A DMRS subset can be viewed as a DMRS transmitted on one or two consecutive OFDM symbols, or can be a period of DMRS transmission. As shown in the left figure of Figure 25, the first subset of DMRS is mapped to the third symbol, the second subset is mapped to the fifth symbol, and in the third and fifth symbols, all ports of the DMRS are completely transmitted. It is. That is to say, the subset of the plurality of DMRSs has the same resource location in the frequency domain mapping, and all of the same ports are mapped, but differ in time. It can be seen that the DMRS pattern on symbol 5 is a repetition of symbol 3, but is mapped on different time domain symbols. It is worth noting that the method described herein can be applied to multiple DMRS subsets. Of course, the patterns of the first subset and the second subset are not excluded, and the number of ports or the density is different. In addition, the disclosure herein is not limited to the case of two subsets, and can be applied to a plurality of subsets. It can be easily seen that the slot structure of the seven time domain symbols supports fewer DMRS subsets than the number of DMRS subsets supported by the 14 symbol slot structures. In the case of high Doppler shift, 14 symbol slot structures often require more DMRS in the time domain, which means more DMRS subsets are needed.
不同的DMRS时域符号个数,DMRS子集位置,间距,端口数,端口序号等都属于DMRS图样,所以总的来说,基站可利用所述联合的指示信息来通知用户时隙结构和数据解调参考信号的图样。所以,本公开也包括基站可利用所述联合的指示信息来通知用户时隙结构和数据解调参考信号 的端口序号和/或参考信号的序列(包括加扰序列,OCC正交序列等)。Different DMRS time domain symbols, DMRS subset position, spacing, port number, port number, etc. all belong to the DMRS pattern, so in general, the base station can use the joint indication information to notify the user of the slot structure and data. Demodulate the pattern of the reference signal. Therefore, the disclosure also includes that the base station can use the joint indication information to notify the user of the slot structure and the data demodulation reference signal. The sequence number of the port and/or the sequence of reference signals (including scrambling sequences, OCC orthogonal sequences, etc.).
实施例9Example 9
所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号的多个端口在时域符号上的复用方式和/或解调参考信号的图样时,还用来指示相位噪声参考信号是否存在。The preset signaling is used to indicate the multiplexing mode of the plurality of ports of the demodulation reference signal on the time domain symbol and/or the mode of demodulating the reference signal, and is also used to indicate whether the phase noise reference signal exists.
其中,所述复用方式是指时分复用或者码分复用。The multiplexing mode refers to time division multiplexing or code division multiplexing.
也可以说,基站利用联合的信令指示相位噪声参考信号(PTRS:phase noise tracking RS)It can also be said that the base station uses the joint signaling to indicate the phase noise tracking signal (PTRS: phase noise tracking RS).
是否存在和解调参考信号多个端口在时域符号上的复用方式,其中解调参考信号多个端口在时域上的复用方式分为码分复用和时分复用。所述相位噪声的参考信号的配置信息包括高层配置相位噪声参考信号是否存在和/或动态的数据调制编码方式大小。Whether there is a multiplexing mode of multiple ports of the demodulation reference signal on the time domain symbol, wherein the multiplexing mode of the plurality of ports of the demodulation reference signal in the time domain is divided into code division multiplexing and time division multiplexing. The configuration information of the reference signal of the phase noise includes whether a high-level configuration phase noise reference signal exists and/or a dynamic data modulation coding mode size.
比如所述相位噪声参考信号的配置信息包括高层信令,基站利用高层RRC信令半静态地指示用户PTRS是否可以存在,如果半静态地配置PTRS存在,则证明传输数据的频带较高,相位噪声(phase noise)很有可能存在,此时相位噪声会引起不同时域OFDM符号上的相位变化。也就是说,如果相位噪声比较严重时,会引起相邻的OFDM符号上的信道差异比较大。一般的,多个DMRS端口在多个时域符号上码分复用时最好的情况是多个时域符号上的信道相同或接近,否则码分复用(CDM)的效果会很差,从而导致信道估计的性能下降。总之,相位噪声存在时会影响多个DMRS端口在时域上做CDM的性能,而相位噪声是否可以存在可根据RRC信令来判断。所以基站利用相同的信令既指示PTRS是否可以存在,又指示DMRS多个端口在时域符号上是不是CDM。如果CDM不能使用,多个端口在时域上最好是时分复用(TDM)。 For example, the configuration information of the phase noise reference signal includes high layer signaling, and the base station uses the high layer RRC signaling to semi-statically indicate whether the user PTRS can exist. If the PTRS exists semi-statically, the frequency band of the transmitted data is proved to be high, and the phase noise is (phase noise) is likely to exist, in which case phase noise causes phase changes on different time domain OFDM symbols. That is to say, if the phase noise is relatively serious, the channel difference on adjacent OFDM symbols is relatively large. In general, when multiple DMRS ports are code-multiplexed on multiple time-domain symbols, the best case is that the channels on multiple time-domain symbols are the same or close, otherwise the effect of code division multiplexing (CDM) will be poor. As a result, the performance of the channel estimation is degraded. In summary, the presence of phase noise affects the performance of multiple DMRS ports in the time domain for CDM, and whether phase noise can exist can be judged according to RRC signaling. Therefore, the base station uses the same signaling to indicate whether the PTRS can exist or not, and indicates whether multiple ports of the DMRS are CDM in the time domain symbol. If the CDM is not available, multiple ports are preferably time division multiplexed (TDM) in the time domain.
此联合信息只适用于DMRS有多个时域符号的情况,尤其适用于至少包含两列相邻的DMRS OFDM符号。This joint information is only applicable to the case where the DMRS has multiple time domain symbols, and is particularly suitable for including at least two columns of adjacent DMRS OFDM symbols.
如图26所示,CDM时,DMRS端口p#1,p#3在相邻的两个OFDM符号上是码分复用的,此时端口p#1和p#3占用了相同的REs,比如在时域上相邻的两个REs,p#1所用的OCC码是[1 1],而p#3所用的OCC码是[1 -1]。对于一个用户的一个DMRS端口,如果相邻的两个OFDM符号上的信道相同或者接近,CDM可以带来码分增益,从而增加信道估计的精准度以提高传输效率。然而在高频段下,相位噪声往往引起不同OFDM符号间信道的相位偏差,从而使CDM方法的信道估计精准度下降,此时TDM是一个不错的选择。如图所示,TDM时,端口p#1,p#3在相邻的两个OFDM符号上是时分复用的,此时p#1和p#3占用了不同的REs。图中端口p#1映射在DMRS所在位置的第一个OFDM符号上,而p#3映射在第二个OFDM符号上。图中端口p#2,p#4和p#1,p#3类似。所以,不同端口在不同OFDM符号上是CDM还是TDM可以根据是否有相位噪声来判断,有相位噪声时用TDM,无相位噪声时用CDM。而有无相位噪声又可以根据PTRS是否可以存在来判断。这样基站就可以利用联合的信息既指示PTRS是否可以存在,又可以指示不同端口在不同OFDM符号上是CDM还是TDM可以根据是否有相位噪声来判断。比如基站用1bit RRC信令来指示,0表示PTRS不可以存在且不同DMRS端口在不同时域符号上是CDM,而1表示PTRS可以存在且不同DMRS端口在不同时域符号上是TDM。或者说,基站通知PTRS是否存在的高层信令和通知DMRS多端口是CDM还是TDM的信令是相同的信令。As shown in FIG. 26, in the case of CDM, DMRS ports p#1, p#3 are code division multiplexed on two adjacent OFDM symbols, and ports p#1 and p#3 occupy the same REs at this time. For example, in the two REs adjacent in the time domain, the OCC code used by p#1 is [1 1], and the OCC code used by p#3 is [1 -1]. For a DMRS port of a user, if the channels on two adjacent OFDM symbols are the same or close, the CDM can bring a code division gain, thereby increasing the accuracy of channel estimation to improve transmission efficiency. However, in the high frequency band, the phase noise often causes the phase deviation of the channel between different OFDM symbols, so that the channel estimation accuracy of the CDM method is lowered, and TDM is a good choice at this time. As shown in the figure, in TDM, ports p#1, p#3 are time division multiplexed on two adjacent OFDM symbols, and p#1 and p#3 occupy different REs. In the figure, port p#1 is mapped on the first OFDM symbol where the DMRS is located, and p#3 is mapped on the second OFDM symbol. Ports p#2, p#4 and p#1, p#3 are similar in the figure. Therefore, whether different ports are CDM or TDM on different OFDM symbols can be judged according to whether there is phase noise, TDM is used for phase noise, and CDM is used when there is no phase noise. The presence or absence of phase noise can be judged based on whether PTRS can exist. In this way, the base station can use the combined information to indicate whether the PTRS can exist, and whether the different ports are CDM or TDM on different OFDM symbols can be judged according to whether there is phase noise. For example, the base station indicates with 1 bit RRC signaling, 0 indicates that PTRS cannot exist and different DMRS ports are CDM on different time domain symbols, and 1 indicates that PTRS can exist and different DMRS ports are TDM on different time domain symbols. In other words, the base station notifies the PTRS whether there is high-level signaling and whether the signaling that the DMRS multi-port is CDM or TDM is the same signaling.
值得注意的是,RRC信令配置PTRS是否存在并不代表一个用户的PTRS一定存在。如果RRC配置了PTRS可以存在,UE可以根据动态配置的MCS来判断PTRS实际是否发送了,比如MCS大于一个门限,PTRS才 发送,否则不发送。此门限值也是RRC信令配置的。而如果RRC配置PTRS不可以存在,那么PTRS就不会发送,无论MCS多少。所以DMRS多个端口是CDM还是TDM也可以根据配置PTRS的RRC信令,MCS,门限值来确定。比如实际RRC配置了PTRS,MCS也大于门限值时DMRS多端口才是TDM,否则是CDM。换句话说,基站通过联合的信息指示DMRS多端口复用方式,PTRS相关的RRC信令,MCS指示,门限值。It is worth noting that the presence of PT signaling to configure PTRS does not necessarily mean that a user's PTRS must exist. If the RRC is configured to be PTRS, the UE can determine whether the PTRS is actually sent according to the dynamically configured MCS. For example, if the MCS is greater than a threshold, the PTRS is Send, otherwise not sent. This threshold is also configured for RRC signaling. If the RRC configuration PTRS does not exist, then the PTRS will not be sent, no matter how many MCS. Therefore, whether the DMRS multiple ports are CDM or TDM can also be determined according to the RRC signaling, MCS, and threshold values of the configured PTRS. For example, the actual RRC is configured with PTRS. When the MCS is greater than the threshold, the DMRS multi-port is TDM, otherwise it is CDM. In other words, the base station indicates the DMRS multi-port multiplexing mode, the PTRS-related RRC signaling, the MCS indication, and the threshold value through the joint information.
另外,本例中涉及的DMRS图样没有讨论DMRS端口在频域上的映射方式,所以频域上DMRS端口复用的方式不影响本公开。如图1所示,p#1,p#2在频域相邻的两个RE上可以是频分复用(FDM,Frequency Division Multiplexing)的,此时p#1,p#2频域上占用不同的REs;也可以是码分复用(CDM,Code Division Multiplexing)的。In addition, the DMRS pattern involved in this example does not discuss the mapping manner of the DMRS port in the frequency domain, so the manner in which the DMRS port is multiplexed in the frequency domain does not affect the present disclosure. As shown in FIG. 1 , p#1, p#2 may be frequency division multiplexing (FDM) on two adjacent REs in the frequency domain, and p#1, p#2 are in the frequency domain. Different REs are occupied; it can also be Code Division Multiplexing (CDM).
所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号的图样时,还用来指示相位噪声参考信号是否存在。其中不同解调参考信号的图样所能支持的正交端口个数不同。比如,对于解调参考信号图样A,能支持最大12个正交端口,而解调参考信号图样B只能支持最大8个正交端口。而问问在高频段下,小区覆盖受限,基站TxRU的个数也有限,此时不需要支持图样A。而高层RRC信令配置PTRS存在时就意味着是在高频段下传输,此时就暗含着不需要支持图样A。也就是说,基站可以用PTRS相关的信令来指示哪些解调参考信号不支持。The preset signaling is used to indicate whether the phase noise reference signal exists when the pattern of the reference signal is demodulated. The number of orthogonal ports that different demodulation reference signals can support is different. For example, for demodulation reference signal pattern A, up to 12 orthogonal ports can be supported, and demodulation reference signal pattern B can only support a maximum of 8 orthogonal ports. In the high frequency band, the coverage of the cell is limited, and the number of base stations TxRU is also limited. At this time, it is not necessary to support the pattern A. The high-level RRC signaling configuration PTRS means that it is transmitted in the high frequency band, and it is implied that there is no need to support the pattern A. That is, the base station can use PTRS related signaling to indicate which demodulation reference signals are not supported.
图19为本公开实施例的配置解调参考信号的装置的结构组成示意图一,如图19所示,所述装置包括:FIG. 19 is a first schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in FIG. 19, the apparatus includes:
指示单元1901,配置为通过预设的信令给第二通信节点指示解调参考信号所用的参数;其中,所述解调参考信号所用的参数包括以下至少之一:解调参考信号的序列的种类、时域位置、图样、密度、正交码长度、根序列、循环移位序列、端口的个数、时域符号的个数、是否与数据同时发送 的指示信息。The indicating unit 1901 is configured to indicate, by using preset signaling, a parameter used by the second communication node to demodulate the reference signal, where the parameter used for demodulating the reference signal includes at least one of: demodulating a sequence of reference signals Type, time domain location, pattern, density, orthogonal code length, root sequence, cyclic shift sequence, number of ports, number of time domain symbols, whether or not to transmit simultaneously with data Instructions.
本公开实施例中,所述指示单元1901,还配置为:通过指示肯定/否定确认ACK/NACK反馈时延的信令给第二通信节点指示解调参考信号所用的参数。In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the indication unit 1901 is further configured to: indicate, by the signaling indicating the positive/negative acknowledgement ACK/NACK feedback delay, the parameter used by the second communication node to demodulate the reference signal.
本公开实施例中,所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号图样时,还用来指示解调参考信号所用的序列的种类。In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the preset signaling is used to indicate the type of the sequence used for demodulating the reference signal when demodulating the reference signal pattern.
本公开实施例中,所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号端口个数时,还用来指示解调参考信号在频域上的发送是连续的还是非连续的。In the embodiment of the present disclosure, when the preset signaling is used to indicate the number of demodulation reference signal ports, it is also used to indicate whether the transmission of the demodulation reference signal in the frequency domain is continuous or discontinuous.
本公开实施例中,所述预设的信令用来指示所述解调参考信号图样或者密度时,还用来指示解调参考信号所用的正交码长度。In the embodiment of the present disclosure, when the preset signaling is used to indicate the demodulation reference signal pattern or density, it is also used to indicate the orthogonal code length used for demodulating the reference signal.
本公开实施例中,所述指示单元1901,还配置为:通过指示以下至少一个信令来指示解调参考信号所用的正交码长度:In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the indicating unit 1901 is further configured to: indicate, by indicating at least one of the following signaling, an orthogonal code length used for demodulating the reference signal:
指示时域调度符号长度的信令、指示正交码最大长度的信令、指示解调参考信号的所述参数的信令。Signaling indicating the length of the time domain scheduling symbol, signaling indicating the maximum length of the orthogonal code, signaling indicating the parameter of the demodulation reference signal.
本公开实施例中,所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号的密度和/或图样时,还用来指示调度资源。In the embodiment of the present disclosure, when the preset signaling is used to indicate the density and/or pattern of the demodulation reference signal, it is also used to indicate scheduling resources.
本公开实施例中,所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号的图样时,还用来指示时隙结构,其中,所述解调参考信号的图样包括以下至少之一:In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the preset signaling is used to indicate a format of the demodulation reference signal, and is also used to indicate a slot structure, where the pattern of the demodulation reference signal includes at least one of the following:
解调参考信号子集的时域位置、时域符号的个数、能支持最大的正交端口数、解调参考信号包括的子集个数。The time domain position of the demodulation reference signal subset, the number of time domain symbols, the number of orthogonal ports that can support the maximum, and the number of subsets included in the demodulation reference signal.
本公开实施例中,所述的指示单元1901通过指示以下至少一个信令来指示解调参考信号所用的图样和/或密度和/或序列和/或时域符号的个数和/或是否与数据同时传输:In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the indicating unit 1901 indicates, by indicating at least one of the following signaling, a pattern and/or a density and/or a sequence and/or a number of time domain symbols used for demodulating the reference signal and/or whether Data is transmitted simultaneously:
指示调制编码方式的信令、指示传输方式的信令、重传指示信令、接收方式; Signaling indicating modulation and coding mode, signaling indicating transmission mode, retransmission indication signaling, and receiving mode;
其中,所述解调参考信号的图样包括以下至少之一:The pattern of the demodulation reference signal includes at least one of the following:
时域符号的个数、是否与数据同时传输的指示信息。The number of time domain symbols, whether or not the information is transmitted simultaneously with the data.
本公开实施例中,所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号的多个端口在时域符号上的复用方式和/或解调参考信号的图样时,还用来指示相位噪声参考信号是否存在;In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the preset signaling is used to indicate the multiplexing mode of the plurality of ports of the demodulation reference signal on the time domain symbol and/or the mode of demodulating the reference signal, and is also used to indicate the phase noise. Whether the reference signal exists;
其中,所述复用方式是指时分复用或者码分复用。The multiplexing mode refers to time division multiplexing or code division multiplexing.
本公开实施例中,所述的指示单元1901通过信令指示第二通信节点不同的解调参考信号组对应的解调参考信号的密度和/或正交码长度不同;In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the indicating unit 1901 indicates that the density and/or the orthogonal code length of the demodulation reference signal corresponding to the different demodulation reference signal groups of the second communication node are different by signaling;
其中,不同的解调参考信号组对应以下至少一个:不同的资源组、不同的解调参考信号端口、不同的传输码字、不同的传输层数。The different demodulation reference signal groups correspond to at least one of the following: different resource groups, different demodulation reference signal ports, different transmission codewords, and different transmission layers.
本公开实施例中,所述指示单元1901通过高层信令配置给第二通信节点多种解调参考信号参数;或者,通过高层信令从预定义的多个解调参考信号图样中配置给第二通信节点其中一部分图样,并且,所述指示单元1901通过动态信令通知第二通信节点所用的解调参考信号的参数或者图样是高层信令中的哪一个。In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the indication unit 1901 configures, by the high layer signaling, a plurality of demodulation reference signal parameters to the second communication node; or, by using the high layer signaling, the configuration is configured from the predefined multiple demodulation reference signal patterns. A part of the two communication nodes, and the indication unit 1901 notifies which of the higher layer signaling the parameter or pattern of the demodulation reference signal used by the second communication node is dynamically signaled.
本公开实施例中,用于解调参考信号发送的带宽可以划分成多个子带,其中,每个子带上是一个完整的序列。In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the bandwidth for demodulating the reference signal transmission may be divided into a plurality of sub-bands, wherein each sub-band is a complete sequence.
本公开实施例中,所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号在一个发送单元中的一个子带上所用的根序列时,还用来指示解调参考信号在相同发送单元上的不同子带、和/或不同发送单元相同子带、和/或不同发送单元不同子带上所用的根序列;In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the preset signaling is used to indicate that the demodulation reference signal is used on the same transmitting unit when the root sequence used on one subband of one transmitting unit is used. Different sub-bands, and/or different sub-bands of different transmitting units, and/or root sequences used on different sub-bands of different transmitting units;
其中,不同子带上的根序列不同或相同;不同发送单元相同子带上的根序列不同或相同。Wherein, the root sequences on different sub-bands are different or the same; the root sequences on the same sub-band of different transmitting units are different or the same.
本公开实施例中,所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号在一个发送单元中的一个子带上所用的循环移位序列时,还用来指示解调参考信号在 相同发送单元上的不同子带、和/或不同发送单元相同子带、和/或不同发送单元不同子带上所用的循环移位序列;In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the preset signaling is used to indicate that the demodulation reference signal is in a cyclic shift sequence used on one subband of a transmitting unit, and is also used to indicate that the demodulation reference signal is Different sub-bands on the same transmitting unit, and/or different sub-bands of different transmitting units, and/or cyclic shift sequences used on different sub-bands of different transmitting units;
其中,不同子带上的循环移位序列的顺序不同或相同;其中,不同发送单元相同子带上循环移位序列的顺序不同或相同。Wherein, the order of the cyclic shift sequences on different sub-bands is different or the same; wherein, the order of the cyclic shift sequences on the same sub-band of different transmitting units is different or the same.
本公开实施例中,所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号在一个发送单元中的一个子带上所用的图样序号时,还用来指示解调参考信号在相同发送单元上的不同子带、和/或不同发送单元相同子带、和/或不同发送单元不同子带上所用的图样序号;In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the preset signaling is used to indicate that the demodulation reference signal is on the same transmitting unit when the pattern number used on one subband of one transmitting unit is used. Different sub-bands, and/or different sub-bands of different transmitting units, and/or pattern numbers used on different sub-bands of different transmitting units;
其中,不同子带上的图样序号不同或相同;其中,不同发送单元相同子带上的图样序号不同或相同。The sequence numbers of the different sub-bands are different or the same; wherein the code numbers on the same sub-bands of different transmission units are different or the same.
本公开实施例中,所述的指示单元1901用所述信令指示第二通信节点用于解调参考信号发送的带宽根据子带长度的不同支持多种划分方法。In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the indicating unit 1901 indicates, by using the signaling, that the bandwidth used by the second communications node for demodulating the reference signal to support multiple partitioning methods according to different lengths of the subbands.
本公开实施例的上述配置解调参考信号的装置位于第一通信节点,例如基站。The above-described apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal of an embodiment of the present disclosure is located at a first communication node, such as a base station.
本领域技术人员应当理解,图19所示的配置解调参考信号的装置中的各单元的实现功能可参照前述配置解调参考信号的方法的相关描述而理解。图19所示的配置解调参考信号的装置中的各单元的功能可通过运行于处理器上的程序而实现,也可通过具体的逻辑电路而实现。It will be understood by those skilled in the art that the implementation function of each unit in the apparatus for configuring the demodulation reference signal shown in FIG. 19 can be understood by referring to the related description of the foregoing method of configuring the demodulation reference signal. The function of each unit in the apparatus for demodulating the reference signal shown in FIG. 19 can be realized by a program running on the processor, or can be realized by a specific logic circuit.
图20为本公开实施例的配置解调参考信号的装置的结构组成示意图二,如图20所示,所述装置包括:FIG. 20 is a second structural diagram of an apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in FIG. 20, the apparatus includes:
确定单元2001,配置为通过接收来自第一通信节点发送的预设的信令来确定解调参考信号所用的参数;其中,所述解调参考信号所用的参数包括以下至少之一:解调参考信号的序列的种类、时域位置、图样、密度、正交码长度、根序列、循环移位序列、端口的个数、时域符号的个数、是否与数据同时发送的指示信息。 The determining unit 2001 is configured to determine a parameter used for demodulating the reference signal by receiving preset signaling sent by the first communications node, where the parameter used for demodulating the reference signal includes at least one of the following: a demodulation reference The type of the sequence of the signal, the time domain position, the pattern, the density, the orthogonal code length, the root sequence, the cyclic shift sequence, the number of ports, the number of time domain symbols, and whether or not the information is transmitted simultaneously with the data.
本公开实施例中,所述的确定单元2001通过来自第一通信节点的用于指示肯定/否定确认ACK/NACK反馈时延的信令来确定所述解调参考信号的参数。In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the determining unit 2001 determines the parameter of the demodulation reference signal by signaling from the first communication node for indicating a positive/negative acknowledgment ACK/NACK feedback delay.
本公开实施例中,所述确定单元2001通过来自第一通信节点的用于指示解调参考信号图样的信令来确定所述解调参考信号所用的序列的种类。In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the determining unit 2001 determines the kind of the sequence used by the demodulation reference signal by signaling from the first communication node for indicating the demodulation reference signal pattern.
本公开实施例中,所述确定单元2001通过来自第一通信节点的用于指示解调参考信号端口个数的信令来确定所述解调参考信号在频域上是连续还是非连续发送。In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the determining unit 2001 determines whether the demodulation reference signal is continuously or discontinuously transmitted in the frequency domain by signaling from the first communication node for indicating the number of demodulation reference signal ports.
本公开实施例中,所述确定单元2001通过来自第一通信节点的用于指示解调参考信号图样和/或者密度的信令来确定所述解调参考信号所用的正交码长度;或者,通过来自第一通信节点的用于指示所述解调参考信号所用的正交码长度的信令来确定解调参考信号图样和/或者密度。。In an embodiment of the present disclosure, the determining unit 2001 determines an orthogonal code length used by the demodulation reference signal by signaling from the first communication node for indicating a demodulation reference signal pattern and/or density; or The demodulation reference signal pattern and/or density is determined by signaling from the first communication node indicating the orthogonal code length used by the demodulation reference signal. .
本公开实施例中,所述的确定单元2001通过来自第一通信节点的以下至少一个指示信令来确定解调参考信号所用的正交码长度:In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the determining unit 2001 determines the orthogonal code length used for demodulating the reference signal by using at least one following signaling from the first communication node:
指示时域调度符号长度的信令、指示正交码最大长度的信令、指示解调参考信号的所述参数的信令。Signaling indicating the length of the time domain scheduling symbol, signaling indicating the maximum length of the orthogonal code, signaling indicating the parameter of the demodulation reference signal.
本公开实施例中,所述确定单元2001通过来自第一通信节点的用于指示调度资源的信令来确定所述解调参考信号的密度和/或图样。In an embodiment of the present disclosure, the determining unit 2001 determines the density and/or pattern of the demodulation reference signal by signaling from the first communication node for indicating scheduling resources.
本公开实施例中,所述确定单元2001通过来自第一通信节点的以下至少一个信令来确定所述解调参考信号的密度和/或图样和/或时域符号的个数和/或是否与数据同时传输:In an embodiment of the present disclosure, the determining unit 2001 determines the density and/or the number of patterns and/or time domain symbols of the demodulation reference signal and/or whether by the at least one signaling from the first communication node. Simultaneous transmission with data:
指示调制编码方式的信令、指示传输方式的信令、重传指示信令、接收方式。Signaling indicating modulation and coding mode, signaling indicating transmission mode, retransmission indication signaling, and receiving mode.
本公开实施例中,所述的确定单元2001收到第一通信节点的信令指示不同的解调参考信号组对应的解调参考信号的密度和/或正交码长度不同; In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the determining unit 2001 receives the signaling of the first communications node, indicating that the density and/or the orthogonal code length of the demodulation reference signal corresponding to different demodulation reference signal groups are different;
其中,不同的解调参考信号组对应以下至少一个:不同的资源组、不同的解调参考信号端口、不同的传输码字、不同的传输层数。The different demodulation reference signal groups correspond to at least one of the following: different resource groups, different demodulation reference signal ports, different transmission codewords, and different transmission layers.
本公开实施例中,所述确定单元2001收到所述第一通信节点通过高层信令配置的多种解调参考信号参数;或者通过高层信令从预定义的多个解调参考信号图样中配置给第二通信节点其中一部分图样,并且,所述确定单元2001通过来自第一通信节点的动态信令得知解调参考信号的参数或者图样是高层信令中的哪一个。In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the determining unit 2001 receives a plurality of demodulation reference signal parameters configured by the first communication node by using high layer signaling, or from a plurality of predefined demodulation reference signal patterns by using high layer signaling. A portion of the pattern is configured for the second communication node, and the determining unit 2001 knows which of the higher layer signaling the parameter or pattern of the demodulation reference signal is by dynamic signaling from the first communication node.
本公开实施例中,用于解调参考信号发送的带宽划分成若干个子带,其中,每个子带上是一个完整的序列。In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the bandwidth for demodulating the reference signal transmission is divided into a number of sub-bands, wherein each sub-band is a complete sequence.
本公开实施例中,所述的确定单元2001通过来自第一通信节点用于指示解调参考信号在一个接收单元中的一个子带上所用的根序列的信令,来确定解调参考信号在相同接收单元上的不同子带、和/或不同接收单元相同子带、和/或不同接收单元不同子带上所用的根序列;In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the determining unit 2001 determines that the demodulation reference signal is in the signaling by the root sequence used by the first communication node to indicate that the demodulation reference signal is on one subband of one of the receiving units. Different sub-bands on the same receiving unit, and/or different sub-bands of different receiving units, and/or root sequences used on different sub-bands of different receiving units;
其中,不同子带上的根序列不同或相同;其中,不同接收单元相同子带上的根序列不同或相同。Wherein, the root sequences on different sub-bands are different or the same; wherein the root sequences on the same sub-band of different receiving units are different or the same.
本公开实施例中,所述的确定单元2001通过来自第一通信节点用于指示解调参考信号在一个接收单元中的一个子带上所用的循环移位序列的信令,来确定解调参考信号在相同接收单元上的不同子带、和/或不同接收单元相同子带、和/或不同接收单元不同子带上所用的循环移位序列;In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the determining unit 2001 determines the demodulation reference by signaling from the first communication node for indicating a cyclic shift sequence used by the demodulation reference signal on one subband of one receiving unit. a cyclic shift sequence used on different subbands of the same receiving unit, and/or the same subband of different receiving units, and/or different subbands of different receiving units;
其中,不同子带上的循环移位序列的顺序不同或相同;其中,不同接收单元相同子带上的循环移位序列的顺序不同或相同。Wherein, the order of the cyclic shift sequences on different sub-bands is different or the same; wherein the order of the cyclic shift sequences on the same sub-band of different receiving units is different or the same.
本公开实施例中,所述的确定单元2001通过来自第一通信节点用于指示解调参考信号在一个接收单元中的一个子带上所用的图样序号的信令,来确定解调参考信号在相同接收单元上的不同子带、和/或不同接收单元相同子带、和/或不同接收单元不同子带上所用的图样序号; In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the determining unit 2001 determines that the demodulation reference signal is in the signaling by using the pattern sequence number used by the first communication node to indicate that the demodulation reference signal is used on one subband of one receiving unit. Different sub-bands on the same receiving unit, and/or different sub-bands of different receiving units, and/or pattern numbers used on different sub-bands of different receiving units;
其中,不同子带上的图样序号不同或相同;其中,不同接收单元相同子带上的图样序号不同或相同。The numbers of the patterns on the different sub-bands are different or the same; wherein the numbers of the patterns on the same sub-bands of different receiving units are different or the same.
本公开实施例中,所述的确定单元2001根据来自第一通信节点的指示信令来确定所使用的子带划分方法。In the embodiment of the present disclosure, the determining unit 2001 determines the used subband dividing method according to the indication signaling from the first communication node.
本公开实施例的上述配置解调参考信号的装置位于第二通信节点,例如终端。The above-described apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal of an embodiment of the present disclosure is located at a second communication node, such as a terminal.
本领域技术人员应当理解,图20所示的配置解调参考信号的装置中的各单元的实现功能可参照前述配置解调参考信号的方法的相关描述而理解。图20所示的配置解调参考信号的装置中的各单元的功能可通过运行于处理器上的程序而实现,也可通过具体的逻辑电路而实现。It will be understood by those skilled in the art that the implementation function of each unit in the apparatus for demodulating the reference signal shown in FIG. 20 can be understood by referring to the related description of the foregoing method of configuring the demodulation reference signal. The functions of the units in the apparatus for demodulating the reference signal shown in FIG. 20 can be realized by a program running on the processor, or can be realized by a specific logic circuit.
在实际应用中,所述装置中的各个单元所实现的功能,均可由位于装置中的中央处理器(CPU,Central Processing Unit)、或微处理器(MPU,Micro Processor Unit)、或数字信号处理器(DSP,Digital Signal Processor)、或现场可编程门阵列(FPGA,Field Programmable Gate Array)等实现。In practical applications, the functions implemented by each unit in the device may be processed by a central processing unit (CPU), or a microprocessor (MPU, digital processor unit) located in the device, or digital signal processing. (DSP, Digital Signal Processor), or Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) implementation.
本公开实施例上述装置如果以软件功能模块的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,也可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本公开实施例的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机、服务器、或者网络设备等)执行本公开各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(ROM,Read Only Memory)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。这样,本公开实施例不限制于任何特定的硬件和软件结合。Embodiments of the Present Disclosure The above apparatus, if implemented in the form of a software function module and sold or used as a standalone product, may also be stored in a computer readable storage medium. Based on such understanding, the technical solution of the embodiments of the present disclosure may be embodied in the form of a software product in essence or in the form of a software product stored in a storage medium, including a plurality of instructions. A computer device (which may be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) is caused to perform all or part of the methods described in various embodiments of the present disclosure. The foregoing storage medium includes various media that can store program codes, such as a USB flash drive, a mobile hard disk, a read only memory (ROM), a magnetic disk, or an optical disk. Thus, embodiments of the present disclosure are not limited to any specific combination of hardware and software.
相应地,本公开实施例还提供一种计算机存储介质,其中存储有计算机程序,该计算机程序配置为执行本公开实施例的配置解调参考信号的方 法。Accordingly, embodiments of the present disclosure also provide a computer storage medium having stored therein a computer program configured to perform the configuration of the demodulation reference signal of an embodiment of the present disclosure. law.
本领域内的技术人员应明白,本公开的实施例可提供为方法、系统、或计算机程序产品。因此,本公开可采用硬件实施例、软件实施例、或结合软件和硬件方面的实施例的形式。而且,本公开可采用在一个或多个其中包含有计算机可用程序代码的计算机可用存储介质(包括但不限于磁盘存储器和光学存储器等)上实施的计算机程序产品的形式。Those skilled in the art will appreciate that embodiments of the present disclosure can be provided as a method, system, or computer program product. Accordingly, the present disclosure may take the form of a hardware embodiment, a software embodiment, or a combination of software and hardware aspects. Moreover, the present disclosure may take the form of a computer program product embodied on one or more computer-usable storage media (including but not limited to disk storage and optical storage, etc.) including computer usable program code.
本公开是参照根据本公开实施例的方法、设备(系统)、和计算机程序产品的流程图和/或方框图来描述的。应理解可由计算机程序指令实现流程图和/或方框图中的每一流程和/或方框、以及流程图和/或方框图中的流程和/或方框的结合。可提供这些计算机程序指令到通用计算机、专用计算机、嵌入式处理机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器以产生一个机器,使得通过计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器执行的指令产生用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的装置。The present disclosure is described with reference to flowchart illustrations and/or block diagrams of methods, apparatus (systems), and computer program products according to embodiments of the present disclosure. It will be understood that each flow and/or block of the flowchart illustrations and/or FIG. These computer program instructions can be provided to a processor of a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, embedded processor, or other programmable data processing device to produce a machine for the execution of instructions for execution by a processor of a computer or other programmable data processing device. Means for implementing the functions specified in one or more of the flow or in a block or blocks of the flow chart.
这些计算机程序指令也可存储在能引导计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备以特定方式工作的计算机可读存储器中,使得存储在该计算机可读存储器中的指令产生包括指令装置的制造品,该指令装置实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能。The computer program instructions can also be stored in a computer readable memory that can direct a computer or other programmable data processing device to operate in a particular manner, such that the instructions stored in the computer readable memory produce an article of manufacture comprising the instruction device. The apparatus implements the functions specified in one or more blocks of a flow or a flow and/or block diagram of the flowchart.
这些计算机程序指令也可装载到计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备上,使得在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行一系列操作步骤以产生计算机实现的处理,从而在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行的指令提供用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的步骤。These computer program instructions can also be loaded onto a computer or other programmable data processing device such that a series of operational steps are performed on a computer or other programmable device to produce computer-implemented processing for execution on a computer or other programmable device. The instructions provide steps for implementing the functions specified in one or more of the flow or in a block or blocks of a flow diagram.
以上所述,仅为本公开的较佳实施例而已,并非用于限定本公开的保护范围。 The above description is only for the preferred embodiments of the present disclosure, and is not intended to limit the scope of the disclosure.
工业实用性Industrial applicability
本公开实施例的技术方案,第一通信节点通过预设的信令给第二通信节点指示解调参考信号所用的参数;其中,所述解调参考信号所用的参数包括以下至少之一:解调参考信号的序列的种类、时域位置、图样、密度、正交码长度、根序列、循环移位序列、端口的个数、时域符号的个数、是否与数据同时发送的指示信息。采用本公开实施例的技术方案,实现了利用其他信令隐含的指示解调参考信号的配置参数,节省了信令的开销。另外,对于多段级联的方法,不同子带上的根序列,循环以为,图样的变化可以带来干扰随机化。 In the technical solution of the embodiment of the present disclosure, the first communication node indicates, by using preset signaling, the second communication node, the parameter used for demodulating the reference signal, where the parameter used for demodulating the reference signal includes at least one of the following: The type of the reference signal sequence, the time domain position, the pattern, the density, the orthogonal code length, the root sequence, the cyclic shift sequence, the number of ports, the number of time domain symbols, and whether or not the information is transmitted simultaneously with the data. With the technical solution of the embodiment of the present disclosure, the configuration parameter indicating the demodulation reference signal implied by other signaling is implemented, which saves signaling overhead. In addition, for the multi-segment cascading method, the root sequence on different sub-bands, the loop thinks that the pattern change can bring interference randomization.

Claims (66)

  1. 一种配置解调参考信号的方法,所述方法包括:A method of configuring a demodulation reference signal, the method comprising:
    第一通信节点通过预设的信令给第二通信节点指示解调参考信号所用的参数;其中,所述解调参考信号所用的参数包括以下至少之一:解调参考信号的序列的种类、时域位置、图样、密度、正交码长度、根序列、循环移位序列、端口的个数、时域符号的个数、是否与数据同时发送的指示信息。The first communication node indicates to the second communication node, by using preset signaling, a parameter used for demodulating the reference signal; wherein the parameter used for demodulating the reference signal includes at least one of: a type of sequence of the demodulation reference signal, Time domain location, pattern, density, orthogonal code length, root sequence, cyclic shift sequence, number of ports, number of time domain symbols, indication information whether or not to transmit simultaneously with data.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的配置解调参考信号的方法,其中,所述的第一通信节点通过指示肯定/否定确认反馈时延的信令给第二通信节点指示解调参考信号所用的参数。The method of configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 1, wherein said first communication node indicates to said second communication node a parameter used for demodulating the reference signal by signaling indicating a positive/negative acknowledgment feedback delay.
  3. 根据权利要求1所述的配置解调参考信号的方法,其中,所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号图样时,还用来指示解调参考信号所用的序列的种类。The method of configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 1, wherein the preset signaling is used to indicate a type of a sequence used for demodulating a reference signal when demodulating a reference signal pattern.
  4. 根据权利要求1所述的配置解调参考信号的方法,其中,所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号端口个数时,还用来指示解调参考信号在频域上的发送是连续的还是非连续的。The method for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 1, wherein the preset signaling is used to indicate the number of demodulation reference signal ports, and is also used to indicate that the demodulation reference signal is transmitted in the frequency domain. Whether it is continuous or non-continuous.
  5. 根据权利要求1所述的配置解调参考信号的方法,其中,所述预设的信令用来指示所述解调参考信号图样或者密度时,还用来指示解调参考信号所用的正交码长度。The method for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 1, wherein the preset signaling is used to indicate the orthogonality used for demodulating the reference signal when the demodulation reference signal pattern or density is used. Code length.
  6. 根据权利要求1所述的配置解调参考信号的方法,其中,所述的第一通信节点通过指示以下至少一个信令来指示解调参考信号所用的正交码长度:The method of configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 1, wherein said first communication node indicates an orthogonal code length used for demodulating a reference signal by indicating at least one of:
    指示时域调度符号长度的信令、指示正交码最大长度的信令、指示解调参考信号的所述参数的信令。Signaling indicating the length of the time domain scheduling symbol, signaling indicating the maximum length of the orthogonal code, signaling indicating the parameter of the demodulation reference signal.
  7. 根据权利要求1所述的配置解调参考信号的方法,其中,所述预设 的信令用来指示解调参考信号的密度和/或图样时,还用来指示调度资源。The method of configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 1, wherein the preset The signaling is used to indicate the density and/or pattern of the demodulated reference signal and is also used to indicate scheduling resources.
  8. 根据权利要求1所述的配置解调参考信号的方法,其中,所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号的图样时,还用来指示时隙结构,其中,所述解调参考信号的图样包括以下至少之一:The method for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 1, wherein the preset signaling is used to indicate a pattern of demodulating a reference signal, and is further used to indicate a slot structure, wherein the demodulation reference The pattern of the signal includes at least one of the following:
    解调参考信号子集的时域位置、时域符号的个数、能支持最大的正交端口数、解调参考信号包括的子集个数。The time domain position of the demodulation reference signal subset, the number of time domain symbols, the number of orthogonal ports that can support the maximum, and the number of subsets included in the demodulation reference signal.
  9. 根据权利要求1所述的配置解调参考信号的方法,其中,所述的第一通信节点通过指示以下至少一个信令来指示解调参考信号所用的图样和/或密度和/或序列和/或时域符号的个数和/或是否与数据同时传输:A method of configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 1 wherein said first communication node indicates a pattern and/or density and/or sequence used to demodulate the reference signal by indicating at least one of the following signals. Or the number of time domain symbols and/or whether they are transmitted simultaneously with the data:
    指示调制编码方式的信令、指示传输方式的信令、重传指示信令、接收方式;Signaling indicating modulation and coding mode, signaling indicating transmission mode, retransmission indication signaling, and receiving mode;
    其中,所述解调参考信号的图样包括以下至少之一:The pattern of the demodulation reference signal includes at least one of the following:
    时域符号的个数、是否与数据同时传输的指示信息。The number of time domain symbols, whether or not the information is transmitted simultaneously with the data.
  10. 根据权利要求1所述的配置解调参考信号的方法,其中,所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号的多个端口在时域符号上的复用方式和/或解调参考信号的图样时,还用来指示相位噪声参考信号是否存在;The method for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 1, wherein the preset signaling is used to indicate a multiplexing mode and/or a demodulation reference of a plurality of ports of the demodulation reference signal on a time domain symbol. The pattern of the signal is also used to indicate whether the phase noise reference signal is present;
    其中,所述复用方式是指时分复用或者码分复用。The multiplexing mode refers to time division multiplexing or code division multiplexing.
  11. 根据权利要求1所述的配置解调参考信号的方法,其中,所述的第一通信节点通过信令指示第二通信节点不同的解调参考信号组对应的解调参考信号的密度和/或正交码长度不同;The method of configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 1, wherein said first communication node indicates, by signaling, a density and/or a demodulation reference signal corresponding to a different demodulation reference signal group of the second communication node The orthogonal code lengths are different;
    其中,不同的解调参考信号组对应以下至少一个:不同的资源组、不同的解调参考信号端口、不同的传输码字、不同的传输层数。The different demodulation reference signal groups correspond to at least one of the following: different resource groups, different demodulation reference signal ports, different transmission codewords, and different transmission layers.
  12. 根据权利要求1所述的配置解调参考信号的方法,其中,所述第一通信节点通过高层信令配置给第二通信节点多种解调参考信号参数;或者,通过高层信令从预定义的多个解调参考信号图样中配置给第二通信节 点其中一部分图样,并且,所述第一通信节点通过动态信令通知第二通信节点所用的解调参考信号的参数或者图样是高层信令中的哪一个。The method for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 1, wherein the first communication node configures a plurality of demodulation reference signal parameters to the second communication node by higher layer signaling; or Multiple demodulation reference signal patterns are configured for the second communication section A part of the pattern is clicked, and the first communication node notifies, by dynamic signaling, which parameter or pattern of the demodulation reference signal used by the second communication node is the higher layer signaling.
  13. 根据权利要求1所述的配置解调参考信号的方法,其中,解调参考信号发送的带宽可以划分成多个子带,其中,每个子带上是一个完整的序列。The method of configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 1, wherein the bandwidth of the demodulation reference signal transmission can be divided into a plurality of sub-bands, wherein each sub-band is a complete sequence.
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的配置解调参考信号的方法,其中,所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号在一个发送单元中的一个子带上所用的根序列时,还用来指示解调参考信号在相同发送单元上的不同子带、和/或不同发送单元相同子带、和/或不同发送单元不同子带上所用的根序列;The method of configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 13, wherein said predetermined signaling is used to indicate a root sequence used by a demodulation reference signal on a subband of a transmitting unit, Indicating a different subband of the demodulation reference signal on the same transmitting unit, and/or the same subband of different transmitting units, and/or a root sequence used on different subbands of different transmitting units;
    其中,不同子带上的根序列不同或相同;不同发送单元相同子带上的根序列不同或相同。Wherein, the root sequences on different sub-bands are different or the same; the root sequences on the same sub-band of different transmitting units are different or the same.
  15. 根据权利要求13所述的配置解调参考信号的方法,其中,所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号在一个发送单元中的一个子带上所用的循环移位序列时,还用来指示解调参考信号在相同发送单元上的不同子带、和/或不同发送单元相同子带、和/或不同发送单元不同子带上所用的循环移位序列;The method of configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 13, wherein said predetermined signaling is used to indicate a cyclic shift sequence used by a demodulation reference signal on a subband of a transmitting unit, a cyclic shift sequence used to indicate different subbands of the demodulation reference signal on the same transmitting unit, and/or the same subband of different transmitting units, and/or different subbands of different transmitting units;
    其中,不同子带上的循环移位序列的顺序不同或相同;其中,不同发送单元相同子带上循环移位序列的顺序不同或相同。Wherein, the order of the cyclic shift sequences on different sub-bands is different or the same; wherein, the order of the cyclic shift sequences on the same sub-band of different transmitting units is different or the same.
  16. 根据权利要求13所述的配置解调参考信号的方法,其中,所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号在一个发送单元中的一个子带上所用的图样序号时,还用来指示解调参考信号在相同发送单元上的不同子带、和/或不同发送单元相同子带、和/或不同发送单元不同子带上所用的图样序号;The method of configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 13, wherein said predetermined signaling is used to indicate a pattern number used by a demodulation reference signal on a subband of a transmitting unit, Indicating a different sub-band of the demodulation reference signal on the same transmitting unit, and/or the same sub-band of different transmitting units, and/or a pattern number used on different sub-bands of different transmitting units;
    其中,不同子带上的图样序号不同或相同;其中,不同发送单元相同子带上的图样序号不同或相同。The sequence numbers of the different sub-bands are different or the same; wherein the code numbers on the same sub-bands of different transmission units are different or the same.
  17. 根据权利要求13所述的配置解调参考信号的方法,其中,所述的 第一通信节点用所述信令指示第二通信节点用于解调参考信号发送的带宽根据子带长度的不同支持多种划分方法。A method of configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 13, wherein said The first communication node uses the signaling to indicate that the bandwidth used by the second communication node to demodulate the reference signal transmission supports multiple partitioning methods according to different subband lengths.
  18. 一种配置解调参考信号的方法,所述方法包括:A method of configuring a demodulation reference signal, the method comprising:
    第二通信节点通过接收来自第一通信节点发送的预设的信令来确定解调参考信号所用的参数;其中,所述解调参考信号所用的参数包括以下至少之一:解调参考信号的序列的种类、时域位置、图样、密度、正交码长度、根序列、循环移位序列、端口的个数、时域符号的个数、是否与数据同时发送的指示信息。The second communication node determines a parameter used for demodulating the reference signal by receiving preset signaling sent by the first communication node; wherein the parameter used for demodulating the reference signal includes at least one of: demodulating the reference signal The type of the sequence, the time domain position, the pattern, the density, the orthogonal code length, the root sequence, the cyclic shift sequence, the number of ports, the number of time domain symbols, and whether or not the information is transmitted simultaneously with the data.
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的配置解调参考信号的方法,其中,所述的第二通信节点通过来自第一通信节点的用于指示肯定/否定确认ACK/NACK反馈时延的信令来确定所述解调参考信号的参数。A method of configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 18, wherein said second communication node determines by means of signaling from the first communication node for indicating a positive/negative acknowledgment ACK/NACK feedback delay Describe the parameters of the demodulation reference signal.
  20. 根据权利要求18所述的配置解调参考信号的方法,其中,所述第二通信节点通过来自第一通信节点的用于指示解调参考信号图样的信令来确定所述解调参考信号所用的序列的种类。The method of configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 18, wherein said second communication node determines said demodulation reference signal by signaling from said first communication node for indicating a demodulation reference signal pattern The type of sequence.
  21. 根据权利要求18所述的配置解调参考信号的方法,其中,所述第二通信节点通过来自第一通信节点的用于指示解调参考信号端口个数的信令来确定所述解调参考信号在频域上是连续还是非连续发送。The method of configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 18, wherein said second communication node determines said demodulation reference by signaling from said first communication node for indicating a number of demodulation reference signal ports Whether the signal is transmitted continuously or discontinuously in the frequency domain.
  22. 根据权利要求18所述的配置解调参考信号的方法,其中,所述第二通信节点通过来自第一通信节点的用于指示解调参考信号图样和/或者密度的信令来确定所述解调参考信号所用的正交码长度;或者,The method of configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 18, wherein said second communication node determines said solution by signaling from said first communication node for indicating a demodulation reference signal pattern and/or density Adjust the orthogonal code length used by the reference signal; or,
    所述第二通信节点通过来自第一通信节点的用于指示所述解调参考信号所用的正交码长度的信令来确定解调参考信号图样和/或者密度。The second communication node determines a demodulation reference signal pattern and/or density by signaling from the first communication node indicating the orthogonal code length used by the demodulation reference signal.
  23. 根据权利要求18所述的配置解调参考信号的方法,其中,所述的第二通信节点通过来自第一通信节点的以下至少一个指示信令来确定解调参考信号所用的正交码长度: The method of configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 18, wherein said second communication node determines an orthogonal code length used for demodulating a reference signal by at least one of following indication signaling from a first communication node:
    指示时域调度符号长度的信令、指示正交码最大长度的信令、指示解调参考信号的所述参数的信令。Signaling indicating the length of the time domain scheduling symbol, signaling indicating the maximum length of the orthogonal code, signaling indicating the parameter of the demodulation reference signal.
  24. 根据权利要求18所述的配置解调参考信号的方法,其中,所述第二通信节点通过来自第一通信节点的用于指示调度资源的信令来确定所述解调参考信号的密度和/或图样。The method of configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 18, wherein said second communication node determines a density of said demodulation reference signal and/or by signaling from said first communication node for indicating a scheduling resource Or pattern.
  25. 根据权利要求18所述的配置解调参考信号的方法,其中,所述第二通信节点通过来自第一通信节点的以下至少一个信令来确定所述解调参考信号的密度和/或图样和/或时域符号的个数和/或是否与数据同时传输:The method of configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 18, wherein said second communication node determines density and/or pattern and sum of said demodulation reference signal by at least one of following signaling from a first communication node / or the number of time domain symbols and / or whether it is transmitted simultaneously with the data:
    指示调制编码方式的信令、指示传输方式的信令、重传指示信令、接收方式。Signaling indicating modulation and coding mode, signaling indicating transmission mode, retransmission indication signaling, and receiving mode.
  26. 根据权利要求18所述的配置解调参考信号的方法,其中,所述的第二通信节点收到第一通信节点的信令指示不同的解调参考信号组对应的解调参考信号的密度和/或正交码长度不同;The method of configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 18, wherein said second communication node receives the signaling of the first communication node indicating a density of demodulation reference signals corresponding to different demodulation reference signal groups and / or orthogonal code length is different;
    其中,不同的解调参考信号组对应以下至少一个:不同的资源组、不同的解调参考信号端口、不同的传输码字、不同的传输层数。The different demodulation reference signal groups correspond to at least one of the following: different resource groups, different demodulation reference signal ports, different transmission codewords, and different transmission layers.
  27. 根据权利要求18所述的配置解调参考信号的方法,其中,所述第二通信节点收到所述第一通信节点通过高层信令配置的多种解调参考信号参数;或者通过高层信令从预定义的多个解调参考信号图样中配置给第二通信节点其中一部分图样,并且,所述第二通信节点通过来自第一通信节点的动态信令得知解调参考信号的参数或者图样是高层信令中的哪一个。The method of configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 18, wherein said second communication node receives a plurality of demodulation reference signal parameters configured by said first communication node by higher layer signaling; or by higher layer signaling And configuring a part of the pattern of the second communication node from the predefined plurality of demodulation reference signal patterns, and the second communication node knows the parameter or pattern of the demodulation reference signal by dynamic signaling from the first communication node. Which is the higher layer signaling.
  28. 根据权利要求18所述的配置解调参考信号的方法,其中,解调参考信号发送的带宽划分成若干个子带,其中,每个子带上是一个完整的序列。The method of configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 18, wherein the bandwidth of the demodulation reference signal transmission is divided into a plurality of sub-bands, wherein each sub-band is a complete sequence.
  29. 根据权利要求28所述的配置解调参考信号的方法,其中,所述的第二通信节点通过来自第一通信节点用于指示解调参考信号在一个接收单 元中的一个子带上所用的根序列的信令,来确定解调参考信号在相同接收单元上的不同子带、和/或不同接收单元相同子带、和/或不同接收单元不同子带上所用的根序列;A method of configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 28, wherein said second communication node is configured to indicate a demodulation reference signal on a receipt by the first communication node Signaling of the root sequence used on a subband of the element to determine different subbands of the demodulation reference signal on the same receiving unit, and/or the same subband of different receiving units, and/or different subbands of different receiving units The root sequence used above;
    其中,不同子带上的根序列不同或相同;其中,不同接收单元相同子带上的根序列不同或相同。Wherein, the root sequences on different sub-bands are different or the same; wherein the root sequences on the same sub-band of different receiving units are different or the same.
  30. 根据权利要求28所述的配置解调参考信号的方法,其中,所述的第二通信节点通过来自第一通信节点用于指示解调参考信号在一个接收单元中的一个子带上所用的循环移位序列的信令,来确定解调参考信号在相同接收单元上的不同子带、和/或不同接收单元相同子带、和/或不同接收单元不同子带上所用的循环移位序列;A method of configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 28, wherein said second communication node passes a loop from said first communication node for indicating a demodulation reference signal on a subband of a receiving unit Transmitting sequenced signaling to determine different subbands of the demodulation reference signal on the same receiving unit, and/or different subbands of different receiving units, and/or cyclic shift sequences used on different subbands of different receiving units;
    其中,不同子带上的循环移位序列的顺序不同或相同;其中,不同接收单元相同子带上的循环移位序列的顺序不同或相同。Wherein, the order of the cyclic shift sequences on different sub-bands is different or the same; wherein the order of the cyclic shift sequences on the same sub-band of different receiving units is different or the same.
  31. 根据权利要求28所述的配置解调参考信号的方法,其中,所述的第二通信节点通过来自第一通信节点用于指示解调参考信号在一个接收单元中的一个子带上所用的图样序号的信令,来确定解调参考信号在相同接收单元上的不同子带、和/或不同接收单元相同子带、和/或不同接收单元不同子带上所用的图样序号;A method of configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 28, wherein said second communication node passes a pattern used by said first communication node to indicate that said demodulation reference signal is on a subband of a receiving unit Serial number signaling to determine different sub-bands of the demodulation reference signal on the same receiving unit, and/or different sub-bands of different receiving units, and/or pattern numbers used on different sub-bands of different receiving units;
    其中,不同子带上的图样序号不同或相同;其中,不同接收单元相同子带上的图样序号不同或相同。The numbers of the patterns on the different sub-bands are different or the same; wherein the numbers of the patterns on the same sub-bands of different receiving units are different or the same.
  32. 根据权利要求28所述的配置解调参考信号的方法,其中,所述的第二通信节点根据来自第一通信节点的指示信令来确定所使用的子带划分方法。The method of configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 28, wherein said second communication node determines the used subband division method based on the indication signaling from the first communication node.
  33. 一种配置解调参考信号的装置,应用于第一通信节点,所述装置包括:An apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal is applied to a first communication node, the apparatus comprising:
    指示单元,配置为通过预设的信令给第二通信节点指示解调参考信号 所用的参数;其中,所述解调参考信号所用的参数包括以下至少之一:解调参考信号的序列的种类、时域位置、图样、密度、正交码长度、根序列、循环移位序列、端口的个数、时域符号的个数、是否与数据同时发送的指示信息。The indicating unit is configured to indicate, by using preset signaling, the demodulation reference signal to the second communication node a parameter used; wherein the parameter used for demodulating the reference signal comprises at least one of: a type of a sequence of the demodulated reference signal, a time domain position, a pattern, a density, an orthogonal code length, a root sequence, and a cyclic shift sequence. The number of ports, the number of time domain symbols, and whether or not the information is sent simultaneously with the data.
  34. 根据权利要求33所述的配置解调参考信号的装置,其中,所述指示单元,还配置为:通过指示肯定/否定确认反馈时延的信令给第二通信节点指示解调参考信号所用的参数。The apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 33, wherein the indication unit is further configured to: indicate, by the signaling indicating a positive/negative acknowledgment feedback delay, to the second communication node to use the demodulation reference signal parameter.
  35. 根据权利要求33所述的配置解调参考信号的装置,其中,所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号图样时,还用来指示解调参考信号所用的序列的种类。The apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 33, wherein said predetermined signaling is used to indicate a type of a sequence used for demodulating a reference signal when demodulating a reference signal pattern.
  36. 根据权利要求33所述的配置解调参考信号的装置,其中,所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号端口个数时,还用来指示解调参考信号在频域上的发送是连续的还是非连续的。The apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 33, wherein the preset signaling is used to indicate the number of demodulation reference signal ports, and is also used to indicate that the demodulation reference signal is transmitted in the frequency domain. Whether it is continuous or non-continuous.
  37. 根据权利要求33所述的配置解调参考信号的装置,其中,所述预设的信令用来指示所述解调参考信号图样或者密度时,还用来指示解调参考信号所用的正交码长度。The apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 33, wherein the predetermined signaling is used to indicate the orthogonality used for demodulating the reference signal when the demodulation reference signal pattern or density is used. Code length.
  38. 根据权利要求33所述的配置解调参考信号的装置,其中,所述指示单元,还配置为:通过指示以下至少一个信令来指示解调参考信号所用的正交码长度:The apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 33, wherein the indication unit is further configured to indicate an orthogonal code length used for demodulating the reference signal by indicating at least one of the following:
    指示时域调度符号长度的信令、指示正交码最大长度的信令、指示解调参考信号的所述参数的信令。Signaling indicating the length of the time domain scheduling symbol, signaling indicating the maximum length of the orthogonal code, signaling indicating the parameter of the demodulation reference signal.
  39. 根据权利要求33所述的配置解调参考信号的装置,其中,所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号的密度和/或图样时,还用来指示调度资源。The apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 33, wherein the predetermined signaling is used to indicate a density and/or a pattern of the demodulation reference signal, and is also used to indicate a scheduling resource.
  40. 根据权利要求33所述的配置解调参考信号的装置,其中,所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号的图样时,还用来指示时隙结构,其中, 所述解调参考信号的图样包括以下至少之一:The apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 33, wherein the preset signaling is used to indicate a pattern of demodulating a reference signal, and is further used to indicate a slot structure, wherein The pattern of the demodulation reference signal includes at least one of the following:
    解调参考信号子集的时域位置、时域符号的个数、能支持最大的正交端口数、解调参考信号包括的子集个数。The time domain position of the demodulation reference signal subset, the number of time domain symbols, the number of orthogonal ports that can support the maximum, and the number of subsets included in the demodulation reference signal.
  41. 根据权利要求33所述的配置解调参考信号的装置,其中,所述的指示单元通过指示以下至少一个信令来指示解调参考信号所用的图样和/或密度和/或序列和/或时域符号的个数和/或是否与数据同时传输:The apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 33, wherein said indication unit indicates a pattern and/or density and/or sequence and/or time for demodulating the reference signal by indicating at least one of the following signals. The number of domain symbols and / or whether it is transmitted simultaneously with the data:
    指示调制编码方式的信令、指示传输方式的信令、重传指示信令、接收方式;Signaling indicating modulation and coding mode, signaling indicating transmission mode, retransmission indication signaling, and receiving mode;
    其中,所述解调参考信号的图样包括以下至少之一:The pattern of the demodulation reference signal includes at least one of the following:
    时域符号的个数、是否与数据同时传输的指示信息。The number of time domain symbols, whether or not the information is transmitted simultaneously with the data.
  42. 根据权利要求33所述的配置解调参考信号的装置,其中,所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号的多个端口在时域符号上的复用方式和/或解调参考信号的图样时,还用来指示相位噪声参考信号是否存在;The apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 33, wherein the preset signaling is used to indicate a multiplexing mode and/or a demodulation reference of a plurality of ports of the demodulation reference signal on a time domain symbol. The pattern of the signal is also used to indicate whether the phase noise reference signal is present;
    其中,所述复用方式是指时分复用或者码分复用。The multiplexing mode refers to time division multiplexing or code division multiplexing.
  43. 根据权利要求33所述的配置解调参考信号的装置,其中,所述的指示单元通过信令指示第二通信节点不同的解调参考信号组对应的解调参考信号的密度和/或正交码长度不同;The apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 33, wherein said indication unit indicates, by signaling, a density and/or an orthogonality of a demodulation reference signal corresponding to a different demodulation reference signal group of the second communication node Different code lengths;
    其中,不同的解调参考信号组对应以下至少一个:不同的资源组、不同的解调参考信号端口、不同的传输码字、不同的传输层数。The different demodulation reference signal groups correspond to at least one of the following: different resource groups, different demodulation reference signal ports, different transmission codewords, and different transmission layers.
  44. 根据权利要求33所述的配置解调参考信号的装置,其中,所述指示单元通过高层信令配置给第二通信节点多种解调参考信号参数;或者,通过高层信令从预定义的多个解调参考信号图样中配置给第二通信节点其中一部分图样,并且,所述指示单元通过动态信令通知第二通信节点所用的解调参考信号的参数或者图样是高层信令中的哪一个。The apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 33, wherein the indication unit configures, by the higher layer signaling, a plurality of demodulation reference signal parameters to the second communication node; or, by a higher layer signaling, from a predefined The demodulation reference signal pattern is configured to a part of the pattern of the second communication node, and the indication unit notifies, by dynamic signaling, which parameter or pattern of the demodulation reference signal used by the second communication node is the higher layer signaling .
  45. 根据权利要求33所述的配置解调参考信号的装置,其中,解调参 考信号发送的带宽可以划分成多个子带,其中,每个子带上是一个完整的序列。The apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 33, wherein the demodulation parameter The bandwidth of the test signal transmission can be divided into multiple sub-bands, where each sub-band is a complete sequence.
  46. 根据权利要求45所述的配置解调参考信号的装置,其中,所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号在一个发送单元中的一个子带上所用的根序列时,还用来指示解调参考信号在相同发送单元上的不同子带、和/或不同发送单元相同子带、和/或不同发送单元不同子带上所用的根序列;The apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 45, wherein said predetermined signaling is used to indicate a root sequence used by a demodulation reference signal on a subband of a transmitting unit, Indicating a different subband of the demodulation reference signal on the same transmitting unit, and/or the same subband of different transmitting units, and/or a root sequence used on different subbands of different transmitting units;
    其中,不同子带上的根序列不同或相同;不同发送单元相同子带上的根序列不同或相同。Wherein, the root sequences on different sub-bands are different or the same; the root sequences on the same sub-band of different transmitting units are different or the same.
  47. 根据权利要求45所述的配置解调参考信号的装置,其中,所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号在一个发送单元中的一个子带上所用的循环移位序列时,还用来指示解调参考信号在相同发送单元上的不同子带、和/或不同发送单元相同子带、和/或不同发送单元不同子带上所用的循环移位序列;The apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 45, wherein said predetermined signaling is used to indicate a cyclic shift sequence used by a demodulation reference signal on a subband of a transmitting unit, a cyclic shift sequence used to indicate different subbands of the demodulation reference signal on the same transmitting unit, and/or the same subband of different transmitting units, and/or different subbands of different transmitting units;
    其中,不同子带上的循环移位序列的顺序不同或相同;其中,不同发送单元相同子带上循环移位序列的顺序不同或相同。Wherein, the order of the cyclic shift sequences on different sub-bands is different or the same; wherein, the order of the cyclic shift sequences on the same sub-band of different transmitting units is different or the same.
  48. 根据权利要求45所述的配置解调参考信号的装置,其中,所述预设的信令用来指示解调参考信号在一个发送单元中的一个子带上所用的图样序号时,还用来指示解调参考信号在相同发送单元上的不同子带、和/或不同发送单元相同子带、和/或不同发送单元不同子带上所用的图样序号;The apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 45, wherein said predetermined signaling is used to indicate a pattern number used by a demodulation reference signal on a subband of a transmitting unit, Indicating a different sub-band of the demodulation reference signal on the same transmitting unit, and/or the same sub-band of different transmitting units, and/or a pattern number used on different sub-bands of different transmitting units;
    其中,不同子带上的图样序号不同或相同;其中,不同发送单元相同子带上的图样序号不同或相同。The sequence numbers of the different sub-bands are different or the same; wherein the code numbers on the same sub-bands of different transmission units are different or the same.
  49. 根据权利要求45所述的配置解调参考信号的装置,其中,所述的指示单元用所述信令指示第二通信节点用于解调参考信号发送的带宽根据子带长度的不同支持多种划分方法。The apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 45, wherein said indicating unit uses said signaling to indicate that a bandwidth used by said second communication node for demodulating reference signal transmission supports multiple according to different lengths of subbands Division method.
  50. 一种配置解调参考信号的装置,应用于第二通信节点,所述装置 包括:A device for configuring a demodulation reference signal applied to a second communication node, the device include:
    确定单元,配置为通过接收来自第一通信节点发送的预设的信令来确定解调参考信号所用的参数;其中,所述解调参考信号所用的参数包括以下至少之一:解调参考信号的序列的种类、时域位置、图样、密度、正交码长度、根序列、循环移位序列、端口的个数、时域符号的个数、是否与数据同时发送的指示信息。a determining unit, configured to determine a parameter used for demodulating the reference signal by receiving preset signaling sent by the first communications node; wherein the parameter used for demodulating the reference signal comprises at least one of: demodulating a reference signal The type of the sequence, the time domain position, the pattern, the density, the orthogonal code length, the root sequence, the cyclic shift sequence, the number of ports, the number of time domain symbols, and whether or not the information is transmitted simultaneously with the data.
  51. 根据权利要求50所述的配置解调参考信号的装置,其中,所述的确定单元通过来自第一通信节点的用于指示肯定/否定确认反馈时延的信令来确定所述解调参考信号的参数。The apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 50, wherein said determining unit determines said demodulation reference signal by signaling from said first communication node for indicating a positive/negative acknowledgment feedback delay Parameters.
  52. 根据权利要求50所述的配置解调参考信号的装置,其中,所述确定单元通过来自第一通信节点的用于指示解调参考信号图样的信令来确定所述解调参考信号所用的序列的种类。The apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 50, wherein said determining unit determines a sequence used for said demodulation reference signal by signaling from said first communication node for indicating a demodulation reference signal pattern kind of.
  53. 根据权利要求50所述的配置解调参考信号的装置,其中,所述确定单元通过来自第一通信节点的用于指示解调参考信号端口个数的信令来确定所述解调参考信号在频域上是连续还是非连续发送。The apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 50, wherein said determining unit determines said demodulation reference signal by signaling from said first communication node for indicating a number of demodulation reference signal ports Whether the frequency domain is continuous or discontinuous.
  54. 根据权利要求50所述的配置解调参考信号的装置,其中,所述确定单元通过来自第一通信节点的用于指示解调参考信号图样和/或者密度的信令来确定所述解调参考信号所用的正交码长度;或者,The apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 50, wherein said determining unit determines said demodulation reference by signaling from said first communication node for indicating a demodulation reference signal pattern and/or density The orthogonal code length used by the signal; or,
    通过来自第一通信节点的用于指示所述解调参考信号所用的正交码长度的信令来确定解调参考信号图样和/或者密度。The demodulation reference signal pattern and/or density is determined by signaling from the first communication node indicating the orthogonal code length used by the demodulation reference signal.
  55. 根据权利要求50所述的配置解调参考信号的装置,其中,所述的确定单元通过来自第一通信节点的以下至少一个指示信令来确定解调参考信号所用的正交码长度:The apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 50, wherein said determining unit determines an orthogonal code length used for demodulating the reference signal by at least one of following indication signaling from the first communication node:
    指示时域调度符号长度的信令、指示正交码最大长度的信令、指示解调参考信号的所述参数的信令。 Signaling indicating the length of the time domain scheduling symbol, signaling indicating the maximum length of the orthogonal code, signaling indicating the parameter of the demodulation reference signal.
  56. 根据权利要求50所述的配置解调参考信号的装置,其中,所述确定单元通过来自第一通信节点的用于指示调度资源的信令来确定所述解调参考信号的密度和/或图样。The apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 50, wherein said determining unit determines a density and/or a pattern of said demodulation reference signal by signaling from said first communication node for indicating a scheduling resource .
  57. 根据权利要求50所述的配置解调参考信号的装置,其中,所述确定单元通过来自第一通信节点的以下至少一个信令来确定所述解调参考信号的密度和/或图样和/或时域符号的个数和/或是否与数据同时传输:The apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 50, wherein said determining unit determines density and/or pattern and/or pattern and/or pattern of said demodulation reference signal by at least one of following signaling from a first communication node The number of time domain symbols and / or whether it is transmitted simultaneously with the data:
    指示调制编码方式的信令、指示传输方式的信令、重传指示信令、接收方式。Signaling indicating modulation and coding mode, signaling indicating transmission mode, retransmission indication signaling, and receiving mode.
  58. 根据权利要求50所述的配置解调参考信号的装置,其中,所述的确定单元收到第一通信节点的信令指示不同的解调参考信号组对应的解调参考信号的密度和/或正交码长度不同;The apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 50, wherein said determining unit receives the signaling of the first communication node indicating a density of demodulation reference signals corresponding to different demodulation reference signal groups and/or The orthogonal code lengths are different;
    其中,不同的解调参考信号组对应以下至少一个:不同的资源组、不同的解调参考信号端口、不同的传输码字、不同的传输层数。The different demodulation reference signal groups correspond to at least one of the following: different resource groups, different demodulation reference signal ports, different transmission codewords, and different transmission layers.
  59. 根据权利要求50所述的配置解调参考信号的装置,其中,所述确定单元收到所述第一通信节点通过高层信令配置的多种解调参考信号参数;或者通过高层信令从预定义的多个解调参考信号图样中配置给第二通信节点其中一部分图样,并且,所述确定单元通过来自第一通信节点的动态信令得知解调参考信号的参数或者图样是高层信令中的哪一个。The apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 50, wherein the determining unit receives a plurality of demodulation reference signal parameters configured by the first communication node by higher layer signaling; or a plurality of demodulation reference signal patterns are defined to be allocated to a part of the pattern of the second communication node, and the determining unit knows that the parameter or pattern of the demodulation reference signal is high layer signaling by dynamic signaling from the first communication node. Which one of them.
  60. 根据权利要求50所述的配置解调参考信号的装置,其中,解调参考信号发送的带宽划分成若干个子带,其中,每个子带上是一个完整的序列。The apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 50, wherein the bandwidth of the demodulation reference signal transmission is divided into a plurality of sub-bands, wherein each sub-band is a complete sequence.
  61. 根据权利要求60所述的配置解调参考信号的装置,其中,所述的确定单元通过来自第一通信节点用于指示解调参考信号在一个接收单元中的一个子带上所用的根序列的信令,来确定解调参考信号在相同接收单元上的不同子带、和/或不同接收单元相同子带、和/或不同接收单元不同子带 上所用的根序列;The apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 60, wherein said determining unit passes a root sequence used by said first communication node for indicating a demodulation reference signal on a subband of a receiving unit Signaling to determine different subbands of the demodulation reference signal on the same receiving unit, and/or different subbands of different receiving units, and/or different subbands of different receiving units The root sequence used above;
    其中,不同子带上的根序列不同或相同;其中,不同接收单元相同子带上的根序列不同或相同。Wherein, the root sequences on different sub-bands are different or the same; wherein the root sequences on the same sub-band of different receiving units are different or the same.
  62. 根据权利要求60所述的配置解调参考信号的装置,其中,所述的确定单元通过来自第一通信节点用于指示解调参考信号在一个接收单元中的一个子带上所用的循环移位序列的信令,来确定解调参考信号在相同接收单元上的不同子带、和/或不同接收单元相同子带、和/或不同接收单元不同子带上所用的循环移位序列;The apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 60, wherein said determining unit passes a cyclic shift from said first communication node for indicating a demodulation reference signal on a subband of a receiving unit Sequence signaling to determine different subbands of the demodulation reference signal on the same receiving unit, and/or different subbands of different receiving units, and/or cyclic shift sequences used on different subbands of different receiving units;
    其中,不同子带上的循环移位序列的顺序不同或相同;其中,不同接收单元相同子带上的循环移位序列的顺序不同或相同。Wherein, the order of the cyclic shift sequences on different sub-bands is different or the same; wherein the order of the cyclic shift sequences on the same sub-band of different receiving units is different or the same.
  63. 根据权利要求60所述的配置解调参考信号的装置,其中,所述的确定单元通过来自第一通信节点用于指示解调参考信号在一个接收单元中的一个子带上所用的图样序号的信令,来确定解调参考信号在相同接收单元上的不同子带、和/或不同接收单元相同子带、和/或不同接收单元不同子带上所用的图样序号;The apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 60, wherein said determining unit passes a pattern number used by said first communication node for indicating a demodulation reference signal on a sub-band of a receiving unit Signaling to determine different sub-bands of the demodulation reference signal on the same receiving unit, and/or different sub-bands of different receiving units, and/or pattern numbers used on different sub-bands of different receiving units;
    其中,不同子带上的图样序号不同或相同;其中,不同接收单元相同子带上的图样序号不同或相同。The numbers of the patterns on the different sub-bands are different or the same; wherein the numbers of the patterns on the same sub-bands of different receiving units are different or the same.
  64. 根据权利要求60所述的配置解调参考信号的装置,其中,所述的确定单元根据来自第一通信节点的指示信令来确定所使用的子带划分方法。The apparatus for configuring a demodulation reference signal according to claim 60, wherein said determining unit determines the used subband division method based on the indication signaling from the first communication node.
  65. 一种计算机存储介质,所述计算机存储介质中存储有计算机可执行指令,该计算机可执行指令配置为执行权利要求1-17任一项所述的配置解调参考信号的方法。A computer storage medium having stored therein computer executable instructions configured to perform the method of configuring a demodulation reference signal of any of claims 1-17.
  66. 一种计算机存储介质,所述计算机存储介质中存储有计算机可执行指令,该计算机可执行指令配置为执行权利要求18-32任一项所述的配置 解调参考信号的方法。 A computer storage medium having stored therein computer executable instructions configured to perform the configuration of any one of claims 18-32 A method of demodulating a reference signal.
PCT/CN2017/078110 2016-11-04 2017-03-24 Method and device for configuring demodulation reference signal, computer storage medium WO2018082244A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201610962502.1 2016-11-04
CN201610962502.1A CN108024342B (en) 2016-11-04 2016-11-04 Method and device for configuring demodulation reference signal

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2018082244A1 true WO2018082244A1 (en) 2018-05-11

Family

ID=62075660

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2017/078110 WO2018082244A1 (en) 2016-11-04 2017-03-24 Method and device for configuring demodulation reference signal, computer storage medium

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN108024342B (en)
WO (1) WO2018082244A1 (en)

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP3567786A4 (en) * 2017-02-04 2020-01-15 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Indication method and device
CN111684852A (en) * 2019-01-11 2020-09-18 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 Resource allocation method, device and computer readable storage medium
CN113852583A (en) * 2021-09-18 2021-12-28 江苏亨鑫众联通信技术有限公司 Demodulation reference signal dynamic configuration method
WO2022067811A1 (en) * 2020-09-30 2022-04-07 华为技术有限公司 Signal sending method, signal receiving method, communication device, and storage medium
CN114402676A (en) * 2019-09-30 2022-04-26 华为技术有限公司 Configuration information acquisition method, configuration method and device of modulation and demodulation reference signal

Families Citing this family (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11310019B2 (en) * 2017-03-23 2022-04-19 Guangdong Oppo Mobile Telecommunications Corp., Ltd. Method and device for transmitting uplink demodulation reference signal
CN110890950B (en) * 2018-09-10 2022-06-14 上海华为技术有限公司 Signal processing method, access network equipment and terminal equipment
WO2020063930A1 (en) * 2018-09-28 2020-04-02 华为技术有限公司 Reference signal sending and receiving method and apparatus
CN110971383B (en) * 2018-09-28 2021-07-16 华为技术有限公司 Method and device for sending and receiving reference signal
CN111148152B (en) * 2018-11-02 2022-07-26 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and device
CN115606288A (en) * 2021-04-12 2023-01-13 北京小米移动软件有限公司(Cn) Method and device for configuring DMRS signal format and generating DMRS signal, and storage medium
CN115865286A (en) * 2021-11-08 2023-03-28 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Reference signal receiving and sending method, first communication node, second communication node and medium

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101882980A (en) * 2010-05-06 2010-11-10 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method and system for indicating uplink demodulation reference signal
CN102378110A (en) * 2010-08-16 2012-03-14 中国移动通信集团公司 Methods for sending and receiving demodulated reference signal (DM-RS) and devices for sending and receiving DM-RS
CN103944847A (en) * 2013-01-18 2014-07-23 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Pilot symbol bearing and processing method, and device
CN104995975A (en) * 2013-06-19 2015-10-21 华为技术有限公司 Interference coordination method and device
WO2016010217A1 (en) * 2014-07-18 2016-01-21 Lg Electronics Inc. Uplink data transmission method in wireless communication system and apparatus for the same
US20160191220A1 (en) * 2010-07-09 2016-06-30 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for transmitting uplink reference signal in a multi-antenna wireless communication system

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102149082B (en) * 2010-02-05 2014-11-26 中国移动通信集团公司 Method, device and system for indicating terminal dedicated demodulation reference signal
WO2014142577A2 (en) * 2013-03-13 2014-09-18 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for transmitting control information and device therefor
US20140286255A1 (en) * 2013-03-25 2014-09-25 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Uplink demodulation reference signals in advanced wireless communication systems
CN104080180B (en) * 2013-03-29 2018-08-21 上海诺基亚贝尔股份有限公司 The DMRS of reduction is configured and the method and apparatus of adaptively selected DMRS configurations

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101882980A (en) * 2010-05-06 2010-11-10 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method and system for indicating uplink demodulation reference signal
US20160191220A1 (en) * 2010-07-09 2016-06-30 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for transmitting uplink reference signal in a multi-antenna wireless communication system
CN102378110A (en) * 2010-08-16 2012-03-14 中国移动通信集团公司 Methods for sending and receiving demodulated reference signal (DM-RS) and devices for sending and receiving DM-RS
CN103944847A (en) * 2013-01-18 2014-07-23 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Pilot symbol bearing and processing method, and device
CN104995975A (en) * 2013-06-19 2015-10-21 华为技术有限公司 Interference coordination method and device
WO2016010217A1 (en) * 2014-07-18 2016-01-21 Lg Electronics Inc. Uplink data transmission method in wireless communication system and apparatus for the same

Cited By (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP3567786A4 (en) * 2017-02-04 2020-01-15 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Indication method and device
US11005625B2 (en) 2017-02-04 2021-05-11 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Reference signal indication method and apparatus to improve spectrum efficiency
CN111684852A (en) * 2019-01-11 2020-09-18 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 Resource allocation method, device and computer readable storage medium
CN114402676A (en) * 2019-09-30 2022-04-26 华为技术有限公司 Configuration information acquisition method, configuration method and device of modulation and demodulation reference signal
WO2022067811A1 (en) * 2020-09-30 2022-04-07 华为技术有限公司 Signal sending method, signal receiving method, communication device, and storage medium
CN113852583A (en) * 2021-09-18 2021-12-28 江苏亨鑫众联通信技术有限公司 Demodulation reference signal dynamic configuration method
CN113852583B (en) * 2021-09-18 2024-01-26 江苏亨鑫科技有限公司 Dynamic configuration method for demodulation reference signals

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN108024342B (en) 2023-04-18
CN108024342A (en) 2018-05-11

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2018082244A1 (en) Method and device for configuring demodulation reference signal, computer storage medium
CN111919411B (en) Method and apparatus for supporting large subcarrier spacing of SS/PBCH blocks
CN110771083B (en) Method, apparatus and system for transmitting or receiving control channel and data channel in wireless communication system
US10412737B2 (en) Partitioning of frequency resources for transmission of control signals and data signals in SC-FDMA communication systems
JP6140751B2 (en) Resource indexing for transmission of response signal in multi-cell TDD communication system
EP3577830B1 (en) Short physical uplink control channel (pucch) design for 5th generation (5g) new radio (nr)
TWI575985B (en) Power control for simultaneous transmission of ack/nack and channel-state information in carrier aggregation systems
JP5529973B2 (en) HARQ execution method and apparatus in wireless communication system
CN115642994A (en) Method, apparatus and system for transmitting or receiving uplink control channel
JP5932554B2 (en) Wireless communication method, wireless communication system, wireless base station, and user terminal
EP3566371B1 (en) Short physical uplink control channel (pucch) design for 5th generation (5g) new radio (nr)
KR20190129126A (en) Numerology-dependent Physical Uplink Control Channel Architecture for Wireless Communications
BRPI0711577A2 (en) efficient channel structure for wireless communication system
CN102959917A (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting control information in a wireless communication system
WO2018144471A1 (en) LONG PHYSICAL UPLINK CONTROL CHANNEL (PUCCH) DESIGN FOR 5th GENERATION (5G) NEW RADIO (NR)
CN114071756A (en) Method and apparatus for distributed resource allocation in a wireless communication system
KR20230041719A (en) Method for transmitting uplink channel in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor
EP2608442B1 (en) Method of blind decoding of control channel for a wireless communication system
CN110679193A (en) Method and computing device for configuring resource scheduling

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 17868403

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 17868403

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1